Romans

Romans front

Introduction to Romans

Part 1: General Introduction

Outline of the book of Romans

1. Introduction (1:1–15)
2. Main Theme: Righteousness is received by trusting in Jesus Christ (1:16–17)
3. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20)
4. Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21)
5. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39)
6. God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36)
7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)
8. Conclusion (15:14–16:27)

Who wrote the book of Romans?

The Apostle Paul wrote the book of Romans and may other books in the New Testament. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was part of a strict Jewish religious group called the Pharisees. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul probably wrote this letter while he was staying in the city of Corinth during his third trip through the Roman Empire.

What is the book of Romans about?

Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Rome. Paul wanted to get them ready to receive him when he visited them. He said his purpose was to “bring about the obedience of faith” (16:26).

In this letter Paul most fully described the gospel of Jesus Christ. He explained that both Jews and non-Jews have sinned, and God will forgive them and declare them righteous only if they believe in Jesus (chapters 1–11). Then he gave them practical advice for how believers should live (chapters 12–16),

How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Romans.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Rome,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Rome.” (See: How to Translate Names)

Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

What are the titles used to refer to Jesus?

In Romans, Paul described Jesus Christ by many titles and descriptions: Jesus Christ (1:1), the Seed of David (1:3), the Son of God (1:4), the Lord Jesus Christ (1:7), Christ Jesus (3:24), Propitiation (3:25), Jesus (3:26), Jesus our Lord (4:24), Lord of Hosts (9:29), a Stumbling Stone and Rock of Offence (9:33), the End of the Law (10:4), the Deliverer (11:26), Lord of the Dead and the Living (14:9), and the Root of Jesse (15:12).

How should theological terms in Romans be translated?

Paul uses many theological terms that are not used in the four Gospels. As early Christians learned more about the meaning of Jesus Christ and his message, they needed words and expressions for new ideas. Some examples of these words are “justification” (5:1), “works of the law” (3:20), “reconcile” (5:10), “propitiation” (3:25), “sanctification” (6:19), and “the old man” (6:6). If your language doesn’t have similar words, you can develop short phrases to communicate these ideas. For example, the term “gospel” can be translated as “the good news about Jesus Christ.”

Translators should also remember that some of these terms have more than one meaning. The meaning will depend on how the author is using the word in that particular passage. For example, “righteousness” sometimes means that a person obeys God’s law. At other times, “righteousness” means that Jesus Christ has perfectly obeyed God’s law for us.

What did Paul mean by “a remnant” of Israel (11:5)?

The idea of a “remnant” is important both in the Old Testament and for Paul. Most of the Israelites were either killed or scattered among other people when the Assyrians and then the Babylonians conquered their land. Only a relatively few Jews survived. They were known as “the remnant.”

In 11:1–9, Paul speaks of another remnant. This remnant is the Jews whom God saved because they believed in Jesus. (See: remnant)

Part 3: Important Translation Issues

What did Paul mean by being “in Christ”?

The phrase “in Christ” and similar phrases occur in 3:24; 6:11, 23; 8:1,2,39; 9:1; 12:5,17; 15:17; and 16:3,7,9,10. Paul used these kinds of phrases as a metaphor to express that Christian believers belong to Jesus Christ. Belonging to Christ means the believer is saved and is made a friend with God. The believer is also promised to live with God forever. However, this idea can be difficult to represent in many languages.

These phrases also have specific meanings that depend on how Paul used them in a particular passage. For example, in 3:24 (“the redemption that is in Christ Jesus”), Paul referred to our being redeemed “because” of Jesus Christ. In 8:9 (“you are not in the flesh but in the Spirit”), Paul spoke of believers submitting “to” the Holy Spirit. In 9:1 (“I tell the truth in Christ”), Paul meant that he is telling the truth that “is in agreement with” Jesus Christ.

Nevertheless, the basic idea of our being united with Jesus Christ (and with the Holy Spirit) is seen in these passages as well. Therefore, the translator has a choice in many passages that use “in.” He will often decide to represent the more immediate sense of “in,” such as, “by means of,” “in the manner of,” or “in regard to.” But, if possible, the translator should choose a word or phrase that represents the immediate sense and the sense of “in union with.” (See: in Christ, in Jesus, in the Lord, in him)

How are the ideas of “holy,” “saints” or “holy ones,” and “sanctify” represented in Romans in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:

• Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless and faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones” or “holy people.” (See: 1:7)
• Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In cases where some other English versions have “saints” or “holy ones,” the ULT uses “believers.” (See: 8:27; 12:13; 15:25, 26, 31; 16:2, 15)
• Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “consecrated,” or “reserved for.” (See: 15:16)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “you” is almost always plural and refers to Paul’s audience. There are only four instances of singular “you,” three of which are quotations from the Old Testament (9:7, 17; 13:4, 15:9). Those exceptions will be addressed in the notes. (See: Forms of You)

What are the major issues in the text of the book of Romans?

For the following verses, modern version of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT includes the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote.

• “he \[God\] works all things together for good” (8:28). Some older versions read, “All things work together for good.”
• “But if it is by grace, it is no longer by works. Otherwise grace would no longer be grace” (11:6). Some older versions read: “But if it is by works, then is it no more grace: otherwise work is no more work.”

The following verse is not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Translators are advised not to include this verse. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have this verse, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets (\[\]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the book of Romans.

• “May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you all. Amen” (16:24).

(See: Textual Variants)

Romans 1

Romans 1 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. Introduction (1:1–15)
   • Greeting (1:1–7)
   • Paul plans to visit Rome (1:8–15)
2. Main Theme: Righteousness is received by having faith in Jesus Christ (1:16–17)
3. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20)
   • All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32)

Special concepts in this chapter

The gospel

This chapter refers to the contents of the Book of Romans as “the gospel” (1:2). Romans is not a Gospel like Matthew, Mark, Luke, or John, which are historical accounts of the life of Jesus. Instead, chapters 1–8 present the biblical gospel, which is the good news of salvation. The gospel contains the following true ideas: Everyone has sinned. Jesus died for our sins. Jesus came back to life again so that we might live for his glory and receive eternal life when we die.

Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God

In this chapter Paul explains that no one has an excuse for sinning. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the eternal punishment of God. The requirement for this punishment was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: believe, believer, belief, unbeliever, unbelief and sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

“God gave them over”

Many scholars view the phrases “God gave them over” and “God gave them up” as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God allows men to pursue their own sinful desires, he does not force them to act sinfully. (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 1:1

Παῦλος

In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “From Paul” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Παῦλος

Paul is the name of a man, an apostle of Jesus. See the information about him in Part 1 of the Introduction to Romans. (See: How to Translate Names)

δοῦλος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, κλητὸς ἀπόστολος

These two phrases give further information about Paul. He describes himself as being someone given the position and authority of being Christ’s servant and apostle. (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

κλητὸς ἀπόστολος, ἀφωρισμένος

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Jesus called to be an apostle and set apart” (See: Active or Passive)

εἰς εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ

Here, for introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Jesusset him apart. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to preach the gospel of God” or “so that I could announce the good news from God” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gospel that comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the gospel from God” (See: Possession)

Romans 1:2

ὃ

Here, which marks that further information is going to be given about “the gospel of God” in the previous verse. Paul is emphasizing that “the gospel of God” has its origin in the holy Scriptures that also come from God. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “that is, the gospel” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

Romans 1:3

περὶ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ

This phrase gives us further information about “the gospel of God.” Paul means that the message of God’s promised good news is about God’s Son, “Christ Jesus” (See verse 1). If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the gospel about his Son” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ

Son is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τοῦ γενομένου ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυεὶδ

Here, from a seed of David is an idiom meaning “David’s descendant.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who was born a descendant of David” (See: Idiom)

κατὰ σάρκα

Here, according to the flesh is an idiom meaning “with reference to physical descent.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “according to natural descent” (See: Idiom)

Romans 1:4

τοῦ ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν δυνάμει κατὰ Πνεῦμα ἁγιωσύνης ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν

In this verse, Paul places these phrases in the order he wants to emphasize. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases, as in the UST. (See: Information Structure)

τοῦ ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “whom God designated as the Son of God” (See: Active or Passive)

Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ

Son of God is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν δυνάμει

Here, in power could refer to: (1) the means by which God designated Jesus as the Son of God. Alternate translation: “who was designated the Son of God by means of power” (2) a new level of power God gave to the Son of God. Alternate translation: “who was designated as the powerful Son of God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Πνεῦμα ἁγιωσύνης

Paul is using the possessive form to describe God’s Spirit that is characterized by holiness. This refers to the Holy Spirit. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an alternate expression, as in the UST. (See: Possession)

ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “by being resurrected from the dead ones” (See: Abstract Nouns)

νεκρῶν

Here, the phrase translated of dead ones refers to dead people. Here it means that Jesus physically died and was buried. If your language has a word or phrase for the place that dead people go, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “from the place where dead people are” (See: Idiom)

νεκρῶν

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the place from where Jesus was resurrected. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the preposition “from” instead of “of.” Alternate translation: “from death” or “from among the dead ones” (See: Possession)

ἡμῶν

Here, our refers to all Christians, so it is inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Romans 1:5

δι’ οὗ

Here, whom refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δι’ οὗ ἐλάβομεν χάριν καὶ ἀποστολὴν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and apostleship, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he who acted kindly toward us and made us his apostles” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐλάβομεν

Here, we is exclusive and your language may require you to mark this form. It could refer to: (1) Paul and other apostles, as in the UST. (2) Paul speaking about himself in a plural form. Alternate translation: “I received” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

εἰς

Here, for introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Jesus made Paul and other people his apostles. Use a natural way in your language introduce a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of obedience and faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for people to faithfully obey Jesus among all the Gentiles” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως

Here, obedience of faith could refer to: (1) obedience that is characterized by trust in God. Alternate translation: “for obedience by trusting in God” or “obedience that comes from trusting in God” (2) obedience that results from trusting in God. Alternate translation: “faith that results in obedience” (See: Possession)

ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

Here, the Gentiles could refer to: (1) the nations. Use this interpretation if you interpreted we to refer to all the apostles and retained it in your translation. Alternate translation: “among all people groups” (2) non-Jewish people groups. Use this interpretation if you interpreted we to refer only to Paul and translated it as “I”. Alternate translation: “among all non-Jewish people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐλάβομεν χάριν καὶ ἀποστολὴν εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “we received grace and apostleship for the sake of his name, for obedience of the faith among all the Gentiles” (See: Information Structure)

ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ

Here Paul uses name figuratively. It could refer to: (1) Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Jesus” (2) Jesus’ reputation. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Jesus’ fame” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 1:6

ἐν οἷς

Here,whom refers to “the Gentiles” who were mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated “the Gentiles” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “among the nations” or “among the Gentiles” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὑμεῖς

In this letter, with four exceptions, the words you and your are plural and refer to the recipients of this letter, who are members of the church at Rome (See 1:7). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers in Christ at Rome” (See: Forms of You)

κλητοὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe called ones who were called by Jesus Christ. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “ones called by Jesus Christ” (See: Possession)

Romans 1:7

πᾶσιν τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ῥώμῃ

In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would then say to whom they were writing, and they would name those people in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “To all of you who are in Rome” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Ῥώμῃ

Rome is the name of a city, the capital city of the Roman Empire. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀγαπητοῖς Θεοῦ

Paul is using the adjective beloved as a noun in order to describe the church at Rome. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this words with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are loved of God” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἀγαπητοῖς Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the beloved who are loved by God. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “loved by God” (See: Possession)

χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipient before introducing the main business of the letter. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace” (See: Blessings)

χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

If your readers would misunderstand the abstract nouns grace and peace, you could express the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show his gracious acts to you and make you feel peaceful” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Father here is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus and the relationship between God and believers. Alternate translation: “our Father God and the Lord Jesus, the Christ” (See: Translating Son and Father)

Πατρὸς ἡμῶν

When Paul writes our here, he is speaking of himself and his readers, so our would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “who is the Father of us Christians” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Romans 1:8

πρῶτον μὲν εὐχαριστῶ τῷ Θεῷ μου διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν, ὅτι ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ.

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because your faith is being proclaimed throughout the whole world, I first want to thank my God through Jesus Christ” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

πρῶτον μὲν

First here indicates that Paul has finished his introduction to the letter, and what follows is the beginning of the content of the letter. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The first thing I want to say is” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

τῷ Θεῷ μου

Paul is using the possessive form my God to express that he belongs to God. Paul does not mean that he owns God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the God I belong to” or “the God that owns me” (See: Possession)

ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way you trust in Christ” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context indicates that other believers are proclaiming how great the faith of the Roman believers is. Alternate translation: “other people are proclaiming your faith” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ

Here, the whole world is an exaggeration that refers to all the parts of the world that were familiar to Paul and his readers, particularly the Roman Empire. Paul is not referring to every place on the planet. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “across the known world” or “wherever the Roman Empire is” (See: Hyperbole)

Romans 1:9

γάρ

For indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul could say in the previous verse that he thanks God for the Roman believers. If it would be helpful to you readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You can be sure this is true because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

μάρτυς…μού ἐστιν ὁ Θεός, ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὡς ἀδιαλείπτως μνείαν ὑμῶν ποιοῦμαι

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses and make a new sentence if necessary. Alternate translation: “God is my witness how I continually make mention of you. I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son” (See: Information Structure)

μάρτυς…μού…ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ

This phrase gives us further information about God. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my witness and I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

μάρτυς…μού

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of witness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who testifies about me” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου

Here, spirit refers to the inner person, which is what a person thinks and feels. Paul means that he serves God with complete devotion. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “with my whole heart” or “wholeheartedly” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ

Here, in indicates the means by which Paul served God and gospel refers specifically to proclaiming the gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by proclaiming the gospel” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gospel that is about God’s Son. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the gospel about his Son” (See: Possession)

Υἱοῦ

Son is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἀδιαλείπτως

Here, continually is an exaggeration that emphasizes how frequently Paul prayed for the church at Rome. Paul does not mean that he spends all of his time praying for them. If your language would not use exaggeration in this way, use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I regularly” or “I habitually” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-hyperbole/01.md)

μνείαν ὑμῶν ποιοῦμαι

Here, making mention is an idiom for prayer. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am … praying for you” (See: Idiom)

Romans 1:10

πάντοτε ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν μου, δεόμενος

This phrase means the same thing as “I continually make mention of you” in the previous verse. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how intensely he prays that God will allow him to visit the church at Rome. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase for the similar passage in the previous verse and in this verse provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “in all my prayers, I beg God” (See: Doublet)

πάντοτε

Here, the word always is an exaggeration that figuratively express the frequency of Paul’s prayers to God for the church at Rome. Paul does not mean that he spends all of his time praying for them. If your language would not use exaggeration in this way, use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “frequently” (See: Hyperbole)

ἐν τῷ θελήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of will, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because God wills for me” or “because God wants me”(See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 1:11

γὰρ

For here indicates that this is a reason clause. Paul is indicating why he constantly prays to visit the church at Rome in verses 9–10. Use a natural way in your language to express the reason for something. Alternate translation: “I am always requesting this because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἰδεῖν ὑμᾶς

Paul uses see figuratively to describe not only seeing the Christians in Rome, but also visiting them and spending time with them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to visit you” (See: Metonymy)

ἵνα

Here, so that indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why he wants to visit the believers at Rome. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

Romans 1:12

τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν

Here, and that is gives us further information about why Paul wants to share “some spiritual gift” with the church at Rome. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “namely” or “specifically” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

συνπαρακληθῆναι ἐν ὑμῖν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to mutually encourage each other” (See: Active or Passive)

διὰ τῆς ἐν ἀλλήλοις πίστεως, ὑμῶν τε καὶ ἐμοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to to refer to the trust in Jesus that both he and his readers shared. Paul means that they should mutually encourage each other because they have a mutual faith in Christ. If this is not clear in your language, you can state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “by both you and I sharing with one another how we trust in God” or “through talking about our common Christian faith” (See: Possession)

πίστεως

See how you translated this word in verse 5 (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 1:13

οὐ θέλω δὲ ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν

Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I definitely want you to be informed” (See: Litotes)

ἀγνοεῖν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to not know” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀδελφοί

Although the term brother is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “fellow believers” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

καὶ ἐκωλύθην ἄχρι τοῦ δεῦρο

Paul assumes that his readers will know that until now means “even at the present time.” He does not mean that he was no longer hindered at the moment he wrote these words. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but I have been hindered and still am now” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκωλύθην

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God hindered me” (See: Active or Passive)

ἵνα τινὰ καρπὸν σχῶ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν

Here, fruit could refer to: (1) people believing in the gospel as a result of Paul’s preaching, which would connect this verse to the idea in verse 15. Alternative translation: “so that I might lead people to salvation among you also” (2) strengthening the believers in Rome, in which case this would have the same meaning as “some spiritual gracious gift” in verse 11. Alternative translation: “so that I might strengthen you also” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 1:14

ὀφειλέτης εἰμί

Paul speaks figuratively of himself as if he was a debtor who owed money to people who were not Jews, such as Greeks and barbarians. Paul means that he was obligated to preach the gospel to non-Jews because God had commanded him to do so. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation, “I am obliged to preach the gospel” (See: Metaphor)

Ἕλλησίν τε καὶ βαρβάροις

Here Paul uses Greeks and barbarians figuratively to represent all the Gentiles referred to in the previous verse. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to all types of Gentiles” (See: Merism)

σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις

Paul speaks figuratively here, using wise ones and foolish ones to represent all types of people among the Gentiles referred to in the previous verse. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to all types of people among the Gentiles” (See: Merism)

Ἕλλησίν τε καὶ βαρβάροις, σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that he is obligated to preach the gospel to every kind of Gentile. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “to each and every kind of Gentile” or “to every single non-Jewish person” (See: Doublet)

Romans 1:15

οὕτως

So here indicates that this a reason clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why someone does something. Alternate translation: “This is the reason why” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Romans 1:16

γὰρ

For indicates the reason why Paul is eager to proclaim the gospel in Rome. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am eager to do this because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οὐ…ἐπαισχύνομαι

Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am greatly honored” (See: Litotes)

οὐ…ἐπαισχύνομαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον

Here, gospel refers specifically to the preaching of the gospel that was mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not ashamed to preach the gospel” (See: Metonymy)

δύναμις γὰρ Θεοῦ ἐστιν εἰς σωτηρίαν

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gospel as the powerful way that God saves people. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for it is the powerful way that God saves” (See: Possession)

εἰς σωτηρίαν

Here, for indicates that salvation is the result of the gospel. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “that results in the salvation” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

εἰς σωτηρίαν παντὶ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for saving everyone” (See: Abstract Nouns)

παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to everyone who believes that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: Ellipsis)

Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι

Paul is speaking of Jewish people and Greek people in general, not of one particular Jew or Greek. If this might confuse your readers, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “both to the Jewish people first and to the Greek people” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον

The phrase the Jew first means that the Jewish people were the first people to hear the gospel. Paul does not mean that the Jew is better or has a high status than the Greek. If this would confuse your readers, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “both to the Jews who first heard the gospel” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ἕλληνι

Here, the Greek refers to non-Jewish people in general. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the non-Jew” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 1:17

γὰρ

For indicates that what follows is the reason why the gospel is the power of God that leads to salvation, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The gospel can save everyone who believes because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

δικαιοσύνη…Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it reveals the righteousness of God” (See: Active or Passive)

δικαιοσύνη…Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται

Paul speaks figuratively about the righteousness of God as if it was an object that could be revealed. He means that people learn about the righteousness of God when someone proclaims the gospel to them. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “when people preach the gospel, those who hear it learn about the righteousness of God” (See: Metaphor)

δικαιοσύνη…Θεοῦ

Here Paul is using the possessive form of God that could refer to: (1) righteousness that comes from God. Alternate translation: “the righteousness from God” (2) righteousness that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “God’s righteousness” (See: Possession)

δικαιοσύνη…Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun righteousness in another way. Alternate translation: “how God causes people to become righteous” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐν αὐτῷ

The pronoun it here refers to “the gospel” that was mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the gospel” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐκ πίστεως εἰς πίστιν

Here, from faith to faith describes how the righteousness of God is revealed. It is an idiom that could mean: (1) completely by faith alone. Alternate translation: “by faith from beginning to end” or “through faith from first to last” (2) by the faith that all believers share, like how the phrase “from sea to sea” means “from one sea to another sea.” Alternate translation: “from one person’s faith to another person’s faith” (3) by faith that leads to increasing faith. Alternate translation: “through faith for faith” or “from one degree of faith to another” (See: Idiom)

καθὼς γέγραπται

Here Paul uses just as it is written to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Habakkuk 2:4). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as it is written in the Scriptures” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

καθὼς γέγραπται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the prophet Habakkuk. Alternate translation: “just as the prophet Habakkuk wrote” (See: Active or Passive)

ὁ δὲ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται

In this sentence Paul quotes Habakkuk 2:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται

Here, live could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternative translation: “will live eternally by faith” (2) the quality of one’s physical life. Alternative translation: “will truly live by faith” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πίστεως

See how you translated this word in verse 5 (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 1:18

γὰρ

For indicates that what follows is the reason why “the righteous one must live by faith,” as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The righteous one must live this way because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἀποκαλύπτεται…ὀργὴ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is revealing his wrath” (See: Active or Passive)

ὀργὴ Θεοῦ

Here Paul uses wrath figuratively to refer to the outcome of God’s wrath, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God’s wrathful punishment” (See: Metonymy)

ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ἀσέβειαν καὶ ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of ungodliness and unrighteousness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “against all the ungodly and unrighteous acts of men” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ἀσέβειαν καὶ ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων

Here, ungodliness and unrighteousness of men figuratively refer to the people who do ungodly and unrighteous things. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “against people who do any ungodly or unrighteous deeds” (See: Metonymy)

τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of unrighteousness and truth, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “who, because they do not want to act righteously, keep holding back what is true about God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀνθρώπων

Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων

This phrase gives us further information about the nature of people, who are called * men* in the previous phrase. It is not making a distinction between different kinds of men. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “these same people who in unrighteousness are holding back the truth” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων

Here Paul speaks of truth figuratively as though it were a person who could be restrained or held back. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “who in unrighteousness prevent the truth from being known” (See: Personification)

Romans 1:19

τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that it is any person. Alternate translation: “what people can know about God” (See: Active or Passive)

αὐτοῖς…αὐτοῖς

The pronoun them refers to the ungodly and unrighteous people mentioned in the previous verse. Unless, otherwise noted, them, “their”, and “they” refer to ungodly and unrighteous people throughout verses 19–32. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all these ungodly and unrighteous people … all these ungodly and unrighteous people” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Romans 1:20

τὰ…ἀόρατα αὐτοῦ…καθορᾶται; ἥ τε ἀΐδιος αὐτοῦ δύναμις καὶ θειότης

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of qualities, power, and nature, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what people cannot see about God, both how eternally powerful he is and who he is are clearly seen” (See: Abstract Nouns)

καθορᾶται

Paul uses seen figurative to refer to perceiving something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “are clearly perceived” (See: Metaphor)

καθορᾶται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people can clearly see” (See: Active or Passive)

κόσμου

Paul uses the world figuratively to refer to the whole universe. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of all that God made” (See: Synecdoche)

τοῖς ποιήμασιν νοούμενα

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which the things God has made understand” (See: Active or Passive)

εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἀναπολογήτους

So indicates that this is a result clause. Use the natural way in your language to express result. Alternate translation: “As a result, they are without excuse” or “This is why they are without excuse” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Romans 1:21

γνόντες τὸν Θεὸν

Here Paul uses having known to imply that these people know about God or know that God exists. He does not mean that they know God personally. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having known about God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐχ ὡς Θεὸν ἐδόξασαν ἢ ηὐχαρίστησαν

Here, not glorify him and nor give him thanks mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that ungodly people dishonor God. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “they thanklessly despise God” or “they completely disregard God” (See: Doublet)

ηὐχαρίστησαν

Here Paul speaks of expressions of thanks figuratively as if they were something that could be given to a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did they thank him” (See: Metaphor)

ἐματαιώθησαν ἐν τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐσκοτίσθη ἡ ἀσύνετος αὐτῶν καρδία

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how foolish these ungodly people became by refusing to honor God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “they became completely senseless in the way they think” (See: Doublet)

ἐματαιώθησαν ἐν τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς αὐτῶν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they began to think futile things” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐσκοτίσθη ἡ ἀσύνετος αὐτῶν καρδία

Here Paul speaks figuratively of the heart as if it could mentally sense things or could become black in color. He also uses darkened figuratively to refer to someone losing the ability to understand something. He means that these people lack spiritual sensitivity and are unable to understand spiritual things. If your readers would not understand what a senseless heart or darkened mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “their heart became incapable of feeling or understanding spiritual things” (See: Metaphor)

καρδία

Here Paul uses heart figuratively to refer a person’s inner being or mind. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “inner being” or “mind” (See: Metonymy)

καρδία

The word heart is a singular noun that refers to the inner beings or minds of a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “inner beings” or “hearts” (See: Collective Nouns)

Romans 1:22

ἐμωράνθησαν

The phrase they became foolish is in contrast to what these unrighteous people claimed about themselves in the previous phrase. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but they became foolish” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ἐμωράνθησαν

Alternate translation: “they became fools” or “they acted like fools” or “they started acting like fools”

Romans 1:23

καὶ

Here, and indicates that what follows describes what these ungodly and unrighteous people did after they “became foolish,” as stated in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “then they” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

καὶ ἤλλαξαν τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ ἐν ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος φθαρτοῦ ἀνθρώπου, καὶ πετεινῶν, καὶ τετραπόδων, καὶ ἑρπετῶν.

Paul uses exchanged figuratively to describe the actions of these ungodly people as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped worshiping God and started worshiping idols that resembled these creatures. If your readers would not understand what exchanged means in this context, you could use an express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “then they stopped glorifying the imperishable God in order to worship images things that God created: perishable humans, birds, four-footed animals, and creeping things” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ ἐν ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος φθαρτοῦ ἀνθρώπου

The two phrases the glory of the imperishable God and a likeness of an image of perishable man mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing with similar phrases to emphasize the contrast between God and man. Use a natural way in your language to express a contrast that uses parallel ideas. (See: Parallelism)

τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what glorifies the imperishable God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the relationship between glory and the imperishable God. This phrase could refer to: (1) the glory that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “the glory that characterizes the imperishable God” (2) the glory that belongs to God. Alternate translation: “the glory that belongs only to the imperishable God” (See: Possession)

ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος

The words translated as likeness and image were used in the Greek translation of the Old Testament to refer to the same thing (Genesis 1:26). Here Paul is using the possessive form to indicate that image is an explanation of likeness. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “a likeness, that is, an image” (See: Possession)

καὶ πετεινῶν, καὶ τετραπόδων, καὶ ἑρπετῶν

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “and likenesses of birds, and likenesses of four-footed animals, and likenesses of creeping things” (See: Ellipsis)

τετραπόδων

The phrase four-footed beasts refers to animals that walk on four feet. Use the most natural form to describe this kind of animal in your language. Alternate translation: “of quadrupeds” or “of four-legged beasts”

Romans 1:24

διὸ

Therefore here introduces a result clause. Paul is stating the result of people rejecting the glory of God in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “This is why” or “Because of this” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if God were physically giving them to lusts. He means that God is allowing them to have what they desire. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God permitted them to become controlled by the lusts of their hearts” (See: Metaphor)

ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν

Paul is using the possessive form to describe lusts that come from their hearts. If this is not clear in your language, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the lusts that come from their hearts” (See: Possession)

τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν

See how you translated “heart” in verse 21. (See: Metonymy)

εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν

This is a result clause. Paul is stating the result of people indulging in the lusts of their hearts. Use the natural way in your language to express result. Alternate translation: “resulting in uncleanness” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of uncleanness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to become unclean” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν

Here Paul uses uncleanness figuratively to refer to sexual immorality as if it were something dirty. He means that these lustful people become spiritually impure as a result of doing sexually immoral acts. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “to become sexually immoral” (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι

Here, to dishonor could refer to: (1) the result of God giving the people over to their lusts. Alternate translation: “which results in them dishonoring” (2) the purpose for which God gave them over to their lusts. Alternate translation: “in order to dishonor” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι τὰ σώματα αὐτῶν

In this clause Paul uses dishonor their bodies figuratively to refer to sexually immoral acts. This is a polite way of referring to a shameful act. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to commit sexually immoral acts” or “to indulging in sexually immoral activity” (See: Euphemism)

Romans 1:25

οἵτινες μετήλλαξαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ψεύδει

Paul uses exchanged figuratively to describe the actions of these ungodly people as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped believing what is true about God and started believing in idols, which are false gods. If your readers would not understand what exchanged means in this context, you could use an express the meaning plainly. See how you translated exchanged in verse 23. Alternative translation, “these people refuse to trust what God says is true and accept what is false” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ψεύδει

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of truth and lie, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is correct about God for what is incorrect” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe truth that is about God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “true” instead of the noun truth. Alternate translation: “the truth about God” (See: Possession)

ἐσεβάσθησαν καὶ ἐλάτρευσαν

These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that these people completely rejected worshiping the true God. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “wholeheartedly worshiped” (See: Doublet)

τῇ κτίσει

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of creation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what was created” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὅς ἐστιν εὐλογητὸς εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας

This phrase gives us further information about the Creator. It is not making a distinction between God and the Creator. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “God who is blessed to eternity” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

ὅς ἐστιν εὐλογητὸς εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας

After naming the Creator, Paul adds a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may he be blessed to eternity” (See: Blessings)

εὐλογητὸς

Paul is using the adjective blessed as a noun in order to describe the Creator. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the blessed one” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 1:26

παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς

See how you translated this phrase in verse 24. (See: Metaphor)

πάθη ἀτιμίας

Paul is using the possessive form to describe passions that are characterized by dishonor. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “dishonorable” instead of the noun “dishonor.” Alternate translation: “dishonorable passions” (See: Possession)

πάθη ἀτιμίας

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of passions and dishonor, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “dishonor themselves by doing what they are passionate about” (See: Abstract Nouns)

γὰρ

The word translated for introduces an explanation of passions of dishonor. This explanation begins after the word for and continues through the end of the next verse. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “That is,” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

μετήλλαξαν τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν εἰς τὴν παρὰ φύσιν

Paul uses exchanged figuratively to describe the actions of ungodly women as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped doing natural sexual acts with men and started doing sexual acts with other women that are contrary to nature. If your readers would not understand what exchanged means in this context, you could use an express the meaning plainly. See how you translated exchanged in verses 23 and 25. Alternative translation, “stopped doing natural sexual acts with men and started doing unnatural sexual acts with women” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν

Paul uses the natural use figuratively to refer to sexual activity between women and men. This is a polite way of referring to something that would be offensive in some cultures. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sexual activity with males” (See: Euphemism)

τὴν παρὰ φύσιν

Paul uses contrary to nature figuratively to refer to sexual activity between women and other women. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “sexual activity with females” (See: Euphemism)

Romans 1:27

ὁμοίως τε καὶ οἱ ἄρσενες

This phrase emphasizes that what follows is similar to 1:26. Alternate translation: “in the same way even the males” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἀφέντες

Paul speaks figuratively of these men as if they were leaving their location to go to another one. He means that they are abandoning or rejecting the way God intended for people to do sexual acts. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “having abandoned” or “having rejected” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν τῆς θηλείας

See how you translated the natural use in the previous verse. (See: Euphemism)

τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν τῆς θηλείας

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the natural use that is associated with the female. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an alternative expression. Alternate translation: “the natural use associated with the female” (See: Possession)

τῆς θηλείας

Paul is speaking of these females in general, not of one particular female. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of females” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

ἐξεκαύθησαν ἐν τῇ ὀρέξει αὐτῶν εἰς ἀλλήλους

Paul speaks figuratively of lust as if it were something that could burn like a fire. He means that their lust is out of control like a burning fire. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “passionately lusted after one another” or “intensely desired each other” (See: Metaphor)

ἐξεκαύθησαν ἐν τῇ ὀρέξει αὐτῶν εἰς ἀλλήλους

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of lust, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “burned lustfully for one another” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἄρσενες ἐν ἄρσεσιν τὴν ἀσχημοσύνην κατεργαζόμενοι

This phrase refers to men doing sexual acts with other men. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “males shamelessly engaging in sexual activity with each other” (See: Euphemism)

κατεργαζόμενοι

Paul speaks figuratively of men doing sexual acts with each other as if it could produce something. He means that what they are doing is morally shameful. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “committing” or “engaging in” (See: Metaphor)

καὶ τὴν ἀντιμισθίαν ἣν ἔδει τῆς πλάνης αὐτῶν, ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπολαμβάνοντες

In the original language the phrase the penalty is at the front of the clause for emphasis. If it would be more natural in your language, you could arrange the order of these phrases to show that emphasis. Alternate translation: “and the penalty which was necessary for their perversion receiving in themselves” (See: Information Structure)

καὶ

Here, and indicates that what follows is the result of the shameless acts. Alternate translation: “and as a result” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπολαμβάνοντες

Paul speaks figuratively of the penalty for their sinful activity as if it were something that they could receive inside of themselves. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “experiencing in their own bodies” or “receiving among themselves” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν ἀντιμισθίαν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of penalty, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the punishing act” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἣν ἔδει τῆς πλάνης αὐτῶν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of perversion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “which was necessary for their perverted acts” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 1:28

οὐκ ἐδοκίμασαν, τὸν Θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει

The phrase having God in their full awareness is an idiom that means “thinking about God” or “acknowledging God.” If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “they did not approve of thinking about God” (See: Idiom)

τὸν Θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of full awareness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “being fully aware of God” or “fully acknowledging that God exists” (See: Abstract Nouns)

παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς

See how you translated this phrase in verses 24 and 26. (See: Metaphor)

εἰς ἀδόκιμον νοῦν

Paul is speaking of the minds of these ungodly people in general, not of one particular mind. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “to disapproved minds” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

εἰς ἀδόκιμον νοῦν

Here, mind refers to a person’s will and moral reasoning. The mind of one of these ungodly people is disapproved, which means that it has been rejected by God as worthless. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state these ideas explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a mind that has become worthless” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ποιεῖν

Here, to do could refer to: (1) the result of a disapproved mind. Alternate translation: “as a result they do” or “causing them to practice” (2) the purpose of a disapproved mind. Alternate translation: “so that they do” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα

The phrase those things that are not proper refers to what Paul describes in verses 29–31. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those improper things that follow” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 1:29

In verses 29–31 Paul uses a repetitive series of sentences and ideas to show how evil these ungodly and unrighteous people are. This is a list of the “things that are not proper” of which those people in verses 18–28 are guilty. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done wrong. (See: Litany)

πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ, πονηρίᾳ, πλεονεξίᾳ, κακίᾳ

Paul uses filled with figuratively to refer to these ungodly people as if they were a container filled with the sins that Paul lists in this clause. Like a container that has been filled with something, the people are completely controlled by these sins. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully controlled by unrighteousness, wickedness, covetousness, and malice” (See: Metaphor)

πεπληρωμένους

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they filled themselves” (See: Active or Passive)

πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ, πονηρίᾳ, πλεονεξίᾳ, κακίᾳ;

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of unrighteousness, wickedness, covetousness, and malice, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “filled with all unrighteous, wicked, covetous, and malicious thoughts” (See: Abstract Nouns)

μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας

Paul uses full of figuratively to refer to these ungodly people as if they were a container full of the sins that Paul lists in this clause. Like a container that is full of something, the people are completely controlled by these sins. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully controlled by envy, murder, strife, deceit, and evil intent” (See: Metaphor)

μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of envy, murder, strife, deceit, and evil intent, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they are full of envious, murderous, contentious, and deceitful thoughts, and they intend to do evil things” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 1:30

θεοστυγεῖς, ὑβριστάς, ὑπερηφάνους, ἀλαζόνας…ἀπειθεῖς

Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who hate God, people who are insolent, people who are arrogant, people who are boastful … people who are disobedient” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

καταλάλους…ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns slanderers and inventors in another way. Alternate translation: “people who speak against others … people who invent ways to do evil things” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν

Paul is using the possessive form to describe inventors who invent evil things. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they invent evil things” (See: Possession)

Romans 1:31

ἀσυνέτους, ἀσυνθέτους, ἀστόργους, ἀνελεήμονας

Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are senseless, faithless, heartless, and merciless” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 1:32

τὸ δικαίωμα

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteous decree, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is rightly decreed” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe a the righteous decree that comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s righteous decree” or “what God decrees is right” (See: Possession)

ὅτι

Here, that indicates that what follows is the content of the the righteous decree of God. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “namely,” or “in other words,” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

τὰ τοιαῦτα…αὐτὰ…τοῖς πράσσουσιν

The pronouns such things and things and them refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in verses 28–31. If this would confuse your readers, you could make state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such improper things … these improper things … those who keep doing these improper things” or “these kinds of evil things … these evil things … those who keep doing these evil things” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἄξιοι θανάτου

Paul is using the adjective worthy as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who deserve death” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “are worthy to die” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν

Here Paul uses death figuratively to refer to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are worthy to die spiritually” or “are worthy of spiritual death” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 2

Romans 2 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20)
   • All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32)
   • All Jews have sinned (2:1–3:8)

In this chapter Paul shifts his audience from Roman Christians to people who “judge” other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: judge, judgment and believe, believer, belief, unbeliever, unbelief)

Special concepts in this chapter

“The Law”

In this chapter Paul uses the singular noun “the law” to refer to the group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. Paul says that those who try to obey the Law of Moses will not be justified by trying to obey it. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. (See: Collective Nouns and law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

In verses 1–5 Paul uses the singular pronoun “you” and the singular noun “man” to refer to all people in general. If your language does not use singular pronouns or singular nouns to refer to a group of people, you can use a different expression. (See: Crowd and Collective Nouns)

Romans 2:1

διὸ

Therefore here marks a new section of the letter. It also introduces a result clause that summarizes the consequences of the behavior that Paul described in 1:18–32. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “So then” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

εἶ…κρίνεις…σεαυτὸν κατακρίνεις…πράσσεις, ὁ κρίνων

Paul uses the singular pronoun you here to refer to all people in general. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “every one of you is … every one of you judges … every one of you condemns yourself … every one of you who judges practices” (See: Crowd)

ἀναπολόγητος

See how you translated this phrase in 1:20.

ὦ ἄνθρωπε

O man here is an exclamation that is meant to convict every judgmental person in the human race. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “every human being” (See: Exclamations)

ἄνθρωπε

Here, man is a singular noun that refers to humanity in general. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter Alternate translation: “human being” (See: Collective Nouns)

γὰρ

Here, for introduces a reason clause. In the rest of the verse Paul gives the reasons why anyone who judges is without excuse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐν ᾧ

The word translated that which is a pronoun that refers to any way or any time a person might judge someone else. You may need to make this explicit in your language. Alternate translation: “anytime” or “in anything that” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τὸν ἕτερον

Here, the other refers to any other person. You may need to make this explicit in your language. Alternate translation: “any other person” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

γὰρ

Here, for introduces a clause that explains why these judgmental people are self-condemned. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this is because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τὰ…αὐτὰ

The phrase the same things refers to acts for which people judge one another. Use a natural way in your language to communicate this idea. Alternate translation: “the very same deeds” or “the same things you judge them for doing” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Romans 2:2

οἴδαμεν

Here, we could refer to: (1) Paul and the church at Rome. Alternate translation: “all of us believers in Christ” (2) mankind in general. Alternate translation: “all people” Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the judgment that God does. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment” or “how God judges” (See: Possession)

τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν κατὰ ἀλήθειαν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of judgment and truth, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how God judges is according to what is true” (See: Abstract Nouns)

κατὰ ἀλήθειαν

This phrase indicates the manner in which God will judge those who act sinfully. He will judge them according to the sins they truly committed. If this phrase might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “based on the facts” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοὺς…πράσσοντας

See how you translated this phrase in 1:32.

τὰ τοιαῦτα

Here, such things refers to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in 1:28–32. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such improper things” or “these kinds of evil things” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 2:3

λογίζῃ δὲ τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ?

Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should know that God will finally judge them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But you should not think, O man, who judges those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things, that you will escape from the judgment of God!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τοῦτο

The pronoun this refers to the final clause of this verse that you will escape from the judgment of God. You could use a natural way in your language to make this idea explicit. Alternate translation: “this fact” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “that you will escape from the judgment of God, O man, who judges those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things” (See: Information Structure)

ὦ ἄνθρωπε

See how you translated this phrase in verse 1. (See: Exclamations)

τὰ τοιαῦτα…αὐτά

The phrases such things and the same things refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in 1:28–32. See how you translated such things in verse 2 and the same things in verse 1. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, judgment is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who someone could escape from. Paul means that no one can avoid God’s judgment. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “that you will not prevent God’s judgment” (See: Personification)

τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ

See how you translated this phrase in verse 2. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 2:4

ἢ τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας καταφρονεῖς, ἀγνοῶν ὅτι τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει?

Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should know that the kindness of God leads them to repentance. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You who scorn the riches of his kindness and forbearance and patience surely know that the kindness of God leads you to repentance!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

καταφρονεῖς…σε

In this verse Paul uses the singular pronoun you here to refer to all of humanity in general. See how you translated you in verses 1 and 3. (See: Crowd)

τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας

Paul speaks figuratively of God’s kindness and forbearance and patience as if they were wealth that could be acquired or rejected. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “acquiring his wonderful kindness and forbearance and patience” (See: Metaphor)

τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words kindness, forbearance, and patience, you could express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of how kind, forbearing, and patient he is” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας…τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the kindness, forbearance, and patience that characterize God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of God’s kindness, forbearance, and patience … God’s kindness” (See: Possession)

τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει

Paul speaks of the kindness of God figuratively as if it were a person who could lead someone to repentance. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God uses his kindness to cause you to repent” (See: Personification)

εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει

Here, to repentance is a goal clause. Paul is stating the goal of the kindness of God. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a goal clause. Alternate translation: “leads you to repent” or “guides you to deeply change the way you perceive things” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

μετάνοιάν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of repentance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to deeply change the way you perceive things” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 2:5

κατὰ δὲ τὴν σκληρότητά σου

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were a hard substance. He means that these people stubbornly refuse to repent from their judgmental way of life. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “But according to your stubbornness” (See: Metaphor)

ἀμετανόητον καρδίαν

Here, heart figuratively refers to a person’s will or inner being. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “unrepentant will” or “unwillingness to repent” (See: Metonymy)

θησαυρίζεις σεαυτῷ ὀργὴν

Here Paul speaks of wrath figuratively as if it were an object that someone could store up. He means that the longer people refuse to repent, the greater is God’s wrath against them. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you are increasing how much wrath God has against you” (See: Metaphor)

ὀργὴν…ὀργῆς

Here Paul uses wrath figuratively to refer to the outcome of God’s wrath, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of this word in 1:18. (See: Metonymy)

ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul assumes that his readers will know that both the day of wrath and the revelation of the righteous judgment of God refer to the time in the future when God will punish all wicked people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the time God finally punishes wicked people and reveals his righteous judgment” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe a day that is characterized by wrath and by the revelation of the righteous judgment of God. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning differently. Alternate translation: “on the day characterized by God’s wrath and the revelation of his righteous judgment” (See: Possession)

ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of wrath, revelation, and judgment, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “on the day of God’s wrathful acts when he reveals how righteously he judges” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the righteous judgment of God as what the revelation reveals. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an alternate expression. Alternate translation: “when God reveals his righteous judgment” (See: Possession)

δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the righteous judgment that is carried out by God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an alternate expression. Alternate translation: “of God judging righteously” (See: Possession)

Romans 2:6

ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ

This clause is a quotation from the Old Testament (Psalm 62:12). If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ

Here Paul uses pay back figuratively to refer to appropriately punishing or rewarding someone as if the punishment or reward was reciprocal payment for that person’s deeds. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will appropriately punish or reward each one according to his deeds” (See: Metaphor)

τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun deeds in another way. Alternate translation: “how he acts” or “what he does” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 2:7

In verses 7–10 Paul explains what he means when he said in verse 6 that God will “pay back to each according to his deeds.”

τοῖς…καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον;

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “eternal life to those who are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility according to endurance of good work” (See: Information Structure)

ζωὴν αἰώνιον

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “eternal life is what God pays back” (See: Ellipsis)

τοῖς…ζητοῦσιν

Paul uses seeking figuratively to refer to these people as if they were trying to find something. He means that they are trying to live in such a way as to obtain glory and honor and incorruptibility. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to those who … keep trying to attain” (See: Metaphor)

τοῖς…καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ…ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον

Here, according to could indicate: (1) the means by which these people are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility. Alternate translation: “everlasting life to those who, by means of endurance of good work, are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility” (2) the reason why God gives these people everlasting live. Alternate translation: “because they endure in good work and are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility, everlasting life”

καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of endurance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to the fact that they keep on doing good work” (See: Abstract Nouns)

δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns glory, honor, and incorruptibility in another way. Alternate translation: “for God to glorify, honor, and cause them to live forever” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 2:8

ἐξ ἐριθείας

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of ambition, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from being selfishly ambitious” (See: Abstract Nouns)

καὶ ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how sinful these people are. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “who are disobedient to all that is true and right” (See: Doublet)

ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ

Here, the truth is spoken of figuratively as if it were a person whom someone could disobey, and unrighteousness is spoken of as if it were a person whom someone could obey. Paul means that these people reject what God says is true and right by disobeying him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who reject what God says is true and right by disobeying him” (See: Personification)

τῇ ἀληθείᾳ…τῇ ἀδικίᾳ

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of truth and unrighteousness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is true … what is unrighteous” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the verse 6. Alternate translation: “wrath and anger is what God pays back” (See: Ellipsis)

ὀργὴ

Here Paul uses wrath figuratively to refer to the outcome of God’s wrath, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of this word in 1:18. (See: Metonymy)

ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of wrath and anger, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God is wrathful and angry” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός

The words wrath and anger mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize God’s intense anger toward people who are disobedient to the truth. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “fierce wrath” or “angry wrath” or “wrathful anger” (See: Doublet)

Romans 2:9

θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία, ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἀνθρώπου τοῦ κατεργαζομένου τὸ κακόν

Paul speaks figuratively of Tribulation and distress as if these ideas were located on top of a person. He means that every evil person will experience Tribulation and distress. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Every human soul that produces the evil will experience tribulation and distress” (See: Metaphor)

θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of Tribulation and * distress*, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “difficult and distressing times” (See: Abstract Nouns)

θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία

These two words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how intense God’s judgment will be against these people. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Distressing tribulation” or “Intense distress” (See: Doublet)

πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἀνθρώπου

Paul uses soul of man to refer to the whole life of a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could use express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every human being” (See: Synecdoche)

ἀνθρώπου

Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of a person” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

τὸ κακόν

Paul is using the adjective evil as a noun in order to describe things people do. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “what is evil” or “things that are evil” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Ἰουδαίου τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνος

This phrase could mean: (1) the Jews will have greater responsibility because God offered salvation to them first. Alternate translation: “especially for the Jewish person and also for the non-Jewish person” (2) the Jews will be judged before non-Jews, which is the same meaning as in 1:16. Alternate translation: “first for the Jewish person and then for the non-Jewish person” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ἕλληνος

See how you translated this phrase in 1:16. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 2:10

δόξα…καὶ τιμὴ

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of glory and honor, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God will glorify and honor” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰρήνη

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Here, peace could refer to: (1) feeling calm and secure. Alternate translation: “a peaceful feeling” (2) being at peace with God. Alternate translation: “a peaceful relationship with God” (3) both a peaceful feeling and a peaceful relationship with God. “a peaceful feeling and a peaceful relationship with God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὸ ἀγαθόν

Paul is using the adjective good as a noun in order to describe things people do. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “good deeds” or “things that are good” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι

See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 2:11

οὐ…ἐστιν προσωπολημψία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of favoritism, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God does not honor one type of person above another” or “God is not more favorable toward one person than another” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 2:12

γὰρ

For here indicates that what follows in verses 12–16 explains the phrase “there is no favoritism with God” in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to make this emphasis explicit. Alternate translation: “Indeed” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ὅσοι…ἀνόμως ἥμαρτον

Paul uses this phrase to refer to non-Jews, which he calls “the Greek” in verses 9–10. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many non-Jewish people as have sinned without the law” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀνόμως…ἀνόμως…νόμῳ…νόμου

The word law is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “without God’s laws … without God’s laws … God’s laws … God’s laws” (See: Collective Nouns)

ἀνόμως…ἀνόμως

Here, without the law refers to not knowing God’s law. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without knowing God’s law” or “in ignorance of God’s law” (See: Idiom)

καὶ ἀπολοῦνται

Here Paul uses perish figuratively to refer to eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will also be punished eternally” or “will also experience eternal punishment” (See: Metonymy)

ὅσοι ἐν νόμῳ ἥμαρτον

Paul uses this phrase to refer to Jews, who are the people to whom God gave his law. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many Jewish people as have sinned with the law” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

διὰ νόμου κριθήσονται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will judge by his law” (See: Active or Passive)

διὰ νόμου

Here, by indicates that the law is the standard by which God will judge those who know his law. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to what the law requires” or “by what the law says” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 2:13

γὰρ

For here indicates that this verse gives the reason why God judges both groups of people mentioned in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why someone does something. Alternate translation: “God judges both groups of people impartially because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

νόμου…νόμου

See how you translated the law in the previous verse. (See: Collective Nouns)

οὐ…δίκαιοι παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ

Paul uses with God figuratively here to describe righteous people as if they were located in the presence of God. He means that God makes them right with himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “are not made righteous by God” (See: Metaphor)

οἱ ποιηταὶ νόμου δικαιωθήσονται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will justify the doers of the law” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 2:14

γὰρ

For here indicates that verses 14–16 give another reason why God judges both groups of people mentioned in verse 12. Verses 14–16 explain why Gentiles who do not know God’s law are still sinners. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why someone does something. Alternate translation: “God also judges both groups of people impartially because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τὰ μὴ νόμον ἔχοντα…νόμον μὴ ἔχοντες

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they own or possess the law. He means that they are unaware of the law that God gave to the Jewish people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated “without the law” in verse 12. Alternative translation: “who are unaware of God’s law … who are unaware of God’s law” (See: Metaphor)

νόμον…τοῦ νόμου…νόμον

See how you translated the law in verse 12. (See: Collective Nouns)

φύσει…ποιῶσιν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun nature in another way. Alternate translation: “naturally do” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὰ τοῦ νόμου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the specific rules that make up the law. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the rules within the law” (See: Possession)

ἑαυτοῖς εἰσιν νόμος

Here Paul speaks of Gentiles figuratively as if they were a law. Paul means that the non-Jewish people still have their own rules about what is right and wrong that are also part of God’s law. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning in plainly. Alternate translation: “are actually obeying the God’s law” (See: Personification)

Romans 2:15

οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν

Paul speaks figuratively of the non-Jewish people obeying some basic rules from the Law of Moses as if they were showing the work of the law to other people. He means that non-Jewish people demonstrate that they naturally understand some rules of the law by obeying those rules. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who make others aware that they understand the work of the law” (See: Metaphor)

τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν

Here Paul speaks figuratively of the works of the law as if they can be written on the surfaces of peoples’ hearts. He means that God has enabled non-Jewish people to know generally what is right or wrong even though they do not know the Law of Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they know the work of the law” (See: Metaphor)

τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the work that characterizes obeying the law. This phrase has a similar meaning to “the things of the law” in the previous verse. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the work that the law requires a person to do” (See: Possession)

γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God wrote on their hearts” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν

See how you translated “heart” in 1:21. (See: Metonymy)

συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως

Paul uses the singular conscience figuratively to refer to the individual consciences of these people. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “their consciences bearing witness” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως

Here Paul uses conscience figuratively as if it were a person bearing witness in a courtroom. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their conscience confirms that this is true” (See: Personification)

συνμαρτυρούσης…καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων

This clause explains what bearing witness means. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer or begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “bearing witness, namely, the thoughts of each person both accusing or even defending them” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων

Here, thoughts are spoken of figuratively as if they were a person who could accuse or defend someone in court. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation (remove preceding comma): “by accusing or defending them in the way they think” (See: Personification)

Romans 2:16

ἐν ἡμέρᾳ

Here, day refers to a point in time when something happens. It does not refer to a 24-hour length of time. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a point in time is coming” (See: Metonymy)

ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὅτε κρίνει ὁ Θεὸς

Paul assumes that his readers will know that the day when God will judge refers to the time in the future when God will judge everyone, as Paul also mentioned in verses 2 and 5. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the future time when God finally judges” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων

Paul is using the possessive form to describe secrets that men have. These secrets are specifically secret thoughts that people have, as indicated by the word “thoughts” in the previous verse. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “men’s secrets” or “the secrets that men keep” (See: Possession)

τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of secrets, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what men secretly think” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τῶν ἀνθρώπων

Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of human beings” or “of people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου, διὰ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “through Christ Jesus, according to my gospel” (See: Information Structure)

κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου

Paul speaks figuratively of the gospel as if it belongs to him. He means that this is the gospel God has entrusted him to preach. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “according to God’s gospel that I preach” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 2:17

δὲ

But here indicates that in verses 17–29 Paul changes topics from talking about non-Jewish people who don’t know the Law of Moses to Jews who know the Law. He explains why the Jews as well cannot escape God’s judgment. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that” or “However” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

εἰ

Here, if indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from this verse to verse 21. Paul speaks as if these descriptions of Jews were hypothetical possibilities, but he means that they are actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

σὺ

Even though Paul is speaking to Jewish people, he is hypothetically addressing an individual, so you and your and yourself is singular throughout 2:17–27 unless otherwise noted. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of you and your and yourself in your translation. (See: Singular Pronouns that refer to Groups)

σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ἐπονομάζῃ

Paul speaks figuratively of the Jews as if they named themselves. He means that they consider themselves to be Jews. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “you call yourself Jewish” or “you regard yourself as truly Jewish” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπαναπαύῃ νόμῳ,

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context, which is God’s judgment of sinners. Alternate translation: “rely upon the law to escape God’s judgment” or “rely upon the law to save you from God’s judgment” (See: Ellipsis)

καυχᾶσαι ἐν Θεῷ

Paul speaks figuratively of the Jews as if they were boasting inside of God. He means that the Jews brag that they are the only nation that knows God. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “brag that you are the only ones who know God” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 2:18

καὶ γινώσκεις τὸ θέλημα, καὶ δοκιμάζεις τὰ διαφέροντα, κατηχούμενος ἐκ τοῦ νόμου,

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “and because you are instructed from the law, you know his will and approve of what is excellent” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τὸ θέλημα

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun will in another way. Alternate translation: “what God wills” (See: Abstract Nouns)

κατηχούμενος ἐκ τοῦ νόμου

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “others having instructed you from the law” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 2:19

πέποιθάς τε σεαυτὸν ὁδηγὸν εἶναι

Paul uses the word yourself to emphasize how convinced the Jews are that they are the only ones who can spiritually guide others. Use a way that is natural in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “and you have convinced yourself that you alone are a guide” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν

Paul uses guide figuratively to refer to the Jews as if they were the only people who could clearly see. He also uses blind figuratively to refer to non-Jews as if they were unable to see. He means that the Jews think they are the only ones who can teach others God’s truth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that you are the only ones who can teach others what is true about God” (See: Metaphor)

ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of guide, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that you can guide blind men” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τυφλῶν

Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to blind people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ὁδηγὸν…τυφλῶν, φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how strongly the Jews believed that non-Jews were ignorant about God’s truth. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the two ideas into one. Alternate translation: “the only ones who can guide those who are unaware of what is true about God” (See: Doublet)

φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει

Here Paul uses light figuratively to refer to a Jewish person, and he uses those in darkness figuratively to refer to non-Jews. He means that the Jews think they can teach non-Jews about God the way that a light shines on people who are in a dark place. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone who can reveal what is true about God to those who do not know about God” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 2:20

παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων, ἔχοντα τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐν τῷ νόμῳ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases, since the third phrase gives the reason for the result that the first two phrases describe. Alternate translation: “since having in the law the form of the knowledge and of the truth, you believe you should be an instructor of foolish men, a teacher of little children” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how strongly the Jews believed that non-Jews were ignorant about God’s truth. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the only people who can instruct those people who are as foolish as children” (See: Doublet)

διδάσκαλον νηπίων

Paul speaks figuratively of the non-Jews as if they were little children. He means that they are ignorant about God. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “people who are spiritually ignorant” or “people who are like uneducated infants” (See: Metaphor)

ἔχοντα τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐν τῷ νόμῳ

Paul speaks figuratively of the law as if it were a physical shape that someone could possess. He means that the law contains God’s true knowledge that the Jews think they exclusively own. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “understanding through God’s law how a person can truly know God” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας

Paul is using the possessive forms of the knowledge and of the truth to describe the form of the law. Here, of knowledge and of the truth could indicate: (1) what the law contains. Alternate translation: “the form that contains the knowledge and the truth” (2) what the law represents. Alternate translation: “what represents knowledge and truth” (See: Possession)

τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of knowledge and * truth*, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what we know about God and what is true about God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 2:21

ὁ οὖν διδάσκων ἕτερον, σεαυτὸν οὐ διδάσκεις? ὁ κηρύσσων μὴ κλέπτειν, κλέπτεις?

In verses 21–23 Paul transitions from his description of the Jews in verses 17–20 to a series of rhetorical questions. These questions emphasize the hypocrisy of the Jews, who thought they were superior to non-Jews because they knew the Law of Moses. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Paul’s words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “then you, who teach another, do not teach yourself! You, who preach not to steal, actually steal!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὖν

Here, then indicates that what follows is the second half of the factual conditional statement that Paul began with “if you name yourself a Jew” in verse 17. Paul wants to show that what the Jews believe and how they live are in contrast. If you divided verses 17–21 into separate sentences, then you may need to include a short form of the “if” statement here. Alternate translation: “if all this is really true, then” or “since all this is really true, then” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἕτερον

Here, another is a singular pronoun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular pronouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “other people” (See: Collective Nouns)

σεαυτὸν οὐ διδάσκεις

Here Paul implies that the Jews need to teach themselves because they do not actually obey the laws that they teach. They act as if they do not know the Law of Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “since you don’t obey the law, do you not teach yourself” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 2:22

ὁ λέγων μὴ μοιχεύειν, μοιχεύεις? ὁ βδελυσσόμενος τὰ εἴδωλα, ἱεροσυλεῖς?

Like in the previous verse, Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form twice to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You, who says not to commit adultery, actually commit adultery! You, who abhor idols, actually rob temples!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἱεροσυλεῖς

Here Paul implies that the temples the Jews rob are where idols are kept and worshipped. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “do you rob temples where idols are kept” or “should you actually enter an idol temple and rob it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 2:23

ὃς ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου, τὸν Θεὸν ἀτιμάζεις

Like in the previous two verses, Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You, who boast in the law, actually dishonor God through the transgression of the law!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὃς ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι

Paul uses in the law figuratively as if it were something that people could boast inside of. He means that the Jews brag that they are the only nation who knows God’s law, which has similar meaning to “boast in God” in verse 17. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “You, who brag that you are the only ones who know God’s law” (See: Metaphor)

διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of transgression, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by transgressing the law” or “by breaking the law” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 2:24

τὸ γὰρ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, καθὼς γέγραπται

If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “For, just as it is written, ‘the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles because of you.’” (See: Information Structure)

γὰρ

For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “These things I have said about you are true because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τὸ…ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

In this clause Paul quotes part of Isaiah 52:5. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

τὸ…ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to indicate the name that belongs to God. Paul does not mean that God is a name. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s name” (See: Possession)

τὸ…ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul uses the name of God figuratively to refer toGod himself. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly, as in the UST. (See: Synecdoche)

τὸ…ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles blaspheme the name of God because of you” (See: Active or Passive)

τὸ…ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because of you the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

δι’ ὑμᾶς

Paul quotes Isaiah implying that the bad behavior of the Jews is what causes the Gentiles to blaspheme the name of God. Since the Jews were supposed to represent God to the world, their bad behavior misrepresented God so that the Gentiles blasphemed him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a result of how you act” or “because of the way you behave” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δι’ ὑμᾶς

Here, you is the plural and refers to the Jewish people. This is the only occurrence of plural you in verses 17–27. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Jewish people” (See: Forms of You)

καθὼς γέγραπται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something Isaiah wrote, you could indicate Isaiah as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” (See: Active or Passive)

γέγραπται

Here Paul uses it is written to indicate a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 52:5). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the scriptures” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

Romans 2:25

γὰρ

For here indicates that [verses 25–29] provide another reason why both Jews and Gentiles will be punished for their sins, as stated in verse 12. Paul is arguing against the idea that circumcision guaranteed a Jew’s salvation, which some Jews believed. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jews will be judged along with Gentiles because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

περιτομὴ…ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of circumcision and uncircumcision, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “being circumcised … your being circumcised has become being uncircumcised” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὠφελεῖ

Paul is leaving out a word here that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “benefits you” (See: Ellipsis)

παραβάτης νόμου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who transgresses the law. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “one who transgresses the law” or “one who breaks the law”(See: Possession)

ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν

Here, your circumcision becomes uncircumcision is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how important it is for God’s people to practice the law. Paul does not mean that the person who transgresses God’s law is no longer physically circumcised. If this would confuse your readers, you express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is as if you are not circumcised” or “it is the same as if you were never circumcised” (See: Hyperbole)

Romans 2:26

ἐὰν οὖν

Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the benefits for the uncircumcised one who keeps the requirements of the law. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Let’s suppose then that” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

ἡ ἀκροβυστία

Paul is using the adjective uncircumcision as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the people who are uncircumcised” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

φυλάσσῃ

Here, keeps is an idiom that means “obeys.” If your readers would not understand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is obedient to” (See: Idiom)

τὰ δικαιώματα τοῦ νόμου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe requirements found in the law. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “what the law requires” or “the law’s requirements” (See: Possession)

οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται

Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize how important it is do what the law requires. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “certainly God will consider his uncircumcision to be circumcision” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “will God not consider his circumcision to be circumcision” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ…περιτομὴν

See how you translated these abstract nouns in the previous verse. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 2:27

καὶ

And here could indicate that what follows is continuing the rhetorical question in the previous verse. If you choose the translate the passage in this way, then replace the ending exclamation point with a question mark. (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

κρινεῖ ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία, τὸν νόμον τελοῦσα

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “since he is fulfilling the law, the uncircumcised by nature will judge” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἡ…ἀκροβυστία

See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of nature, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the naturally uncircumcised” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τελοῦσα

Here, fulfilling is an idiom that means “fully obeying.” If your readers would not understand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is fully obedient to” (See: Idiom)

διὰ γράμματος καὶ περιτομῆς

Here, through could mean: (1) the Jews will be judged despite having the letter and circumcision. Alternate translation: “despite having letter and circumcision” (2) the Jews will be judged while having the letter and circumcision. Alternate translation: “while having letter and circumcision” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

γράμματος

Paul is figuratively describing the law by association with the letters that make up the law. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the written law code” or “God’s written law” (See: Metonymy)

περιτομῆς

See how you translated this abstract noun in the previous two verses. (See: Abstract Nouns)

παραβάτην νόμου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun transgressor with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “someone who transgresses the law” or “someone who breaks God’s law” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 2:28

γὰρ

For here indicates that what follows is the reason for what has just been stated. This verse is Paul’s conclusion to the statements he made in verses 25–27. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Truly” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Ἰουδαῖός

Here Paul uses Jew to refer to someone who is one of God’s people because he truly trusts in God for salvation, like Abraham did. Jew here does not refer to someone who only has Jewish ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spiritual Jew” (See: Metonymy)

ἐν τῷ φανερῷ

Here, visibly refers to the Jewish religious practices that other people can see, such as circumcision or wearing special clothing. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does externally visible Jewish rituals” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡ…περιτομή

Here Paul uses circumcision figuratively to refer to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, like how circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This was called “circumcision of the heart” in the Old Testament (Deuteronomy 30:6; Jeremiah 4:4). Here, circumcision does not refer to the Jewish ritual. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this spiritual circumcision” (See: Metonymy)

ἐν σαρκὶ

Paul uses the flesh figuratively to mean “the whole body,” which is made of flesh. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “on the body” (See: Synecdoche)

Romans 2:29

ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ Ἰουδαῖος

The word translated secretly refers to something that other people cannot see or that is hidden. The meaning here is the opposite of “visibly” in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a Jew in an inward way not seen by others” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ἰουδαῖος

Here Paul uses Jew figuratively in the same way he did in the previous verse. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: Metonymy)

περιτομὴ καρδίας

Paul is using the possessive form to describe a circumcision that is performed in the heart. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “circumcision is performed in the heart” or “circumcision is an inward change” (See: Possession)

περιτομὴ καρδίας

The phrase circumcision of the heart is an idiom that refers to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, like how circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This expression first occurred in the Old Testament (Deuteronomy 30:6; Jeremiah 4:4).If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. See how you translated “this circumcision” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “truly belonging to God’s people is by removal of sin” (See: Idiom)

καρδίας

See how you translated this word in 1:21. (See: Metonymy)

ἐν Πνεύματι, οὐ γράμματι

Here, both occurrences of in indicate the means by which something happened. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit, not by means of the letter” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν Πνεύματι

Here, the Spirit could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, who changes a person’s thoughts and attitude when God saves that person, as in the UST. (2) a person’s spirit, which would require interpreting in to refer to a place. Alternate translation: “in one’s spirit” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

γράμματι

See how you translated letter in verse 27. (See: Metonymy)

οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος

The pronoun whose refers to the one who is inwardly a Jew. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “that inward Jew’s praise” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος

Paul is using the possessive form whose to indicate who receives the praise. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “his praise” (See: Possession)

ἐξ ἀνθρώπων

Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “from people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Romans 3

Romans 3 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20)
   • All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32)
   • All Jews have sinned (2:1–3:8)
   • Everyone has sinned (3:9–20)
2. Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21)
   • God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26)
   • No one can boast in works (3:27–31)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 4 and 10–18 of this chapter, which are quotations from the Old Testament.

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Rhetorical Questions

In verses 1–9 and 27–31 Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter in order to answer objections that Jews might make about what he is saying. You may need to indicate that Paul is asking these questions as if he were a non-Christian Jew responding to his arguments. When Paul asks the rhetorical questions, he is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. When Paul answers those questions, he is speaking as himself. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this change in speakers with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: Rhetorical Question and Quote Markings)

Romans 3:1

In verses 1–9 Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions and answers in order to emphasize that both “Jews and Greeks” are “under sin.”

τί οὖν

Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 2:28–29. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then what is” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς?

This verse contains two rhetorical questions connected by or. Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 2:28–29. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then the Jew certainly has no advantage, and circumcision certainly has no benefit!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς

In this verse Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: Quote Markings)

τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of advantage or benefit, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “How then is being a Jew advantageous, or how is being circumcised beneficial” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τοῦ Ἰουδαίου

Paul is using the possessive form of the Jew to describe for whom there is the advantage. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “for the Jew” (See: Possession)

τῆς περιτομῆς

Paul is using the possessive form of the circumcision to describe from where the benefit comes. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “that comes from circumcision” or “from being circumcised” (See: Possession)

Romans 3:2

πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον

In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘Great in every way!’” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The advantage of the Jew and the benefit of the circumcision is great is every way” (See: Ellipsis)

πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον

Great in every way is an exaggeration that Paul uses to emphasize the value of being Jewish and being circumcised. Paul does not mean that everything about being a Jew and being circumcised is beneficial. If your readers would misunderstand thus, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows enthusiasm. Alternate translation: “Great in many ways” (See: Hyperbole)

πρῶτον μὲν…ὅτι

Here, indeed first, that could indicate that: (1) what follows is the first reason in a list of several reasons why being a Jew is beneficial, in which case Paul does not continue the list in this chapter. Alternate translation: “the first of many benefits is indeed that” or “one benefit is indeed that” (2) what follows is the most important reason why being a Jew is beneficial. Alternate translation: “the primary benefit is indeed that” or “the most important thing is indeed that” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐπιστεύθησαν τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God entrusted them with his sayings” or “God trusted them with the sayings of God” (See: Active or Passive)

τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, the sayings of God could refer to: (1) the entire Old Testament. Alternate translation: “with what God said in the Scriptures” (2) direct speech from God in the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “with the messages that God announced to them in the Scriptures” (See: Metonymy)

τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, the possessive form of God could refer to: (1) sayings that came from God. Alternate translation: “with the sayings from God” (2) says that are about God. Alternate translation: “with the sayings about God” (See: Possession)

Romans 3:3

γάρ

For here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τί…εἰ ἠπίστησάν τινες? μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει?

In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But some of them were unfaithful! Their unfaithfulness surely cannot nullify the faithfulness of God!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί γάρ εἰ ἠπίστησάν τινες? μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει?

In this verse Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: Quote Markings)

τινες

The pronoun some refers to some Jewish people. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “some Jewish people” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of unfaithfulness or faithfulness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “The fact that they are unfaithful will not nullify God’s faithful acts, will it” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the faithfulness that characterizes God. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the faithfulness that characterizes God” (See: Possession)

Romans 3:4

μὴ γένοιτο

In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

μὴ γένοιτο

May it never be is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong prohibition. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating a strong prohibition. Alternate translation: “Absolutely not” or “Certainly not” (See: Exclamations)

δὲ

Instead here indicates that what follows is a contrast to the idea in the previous verse that unfaithful Jews could “nullify the faithfulness of God.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But” or “However” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

γινέσθω…ὁ Θεὸς ἀληθής

Here, let God be true is an imperative phrase, but this is not a command. Instead, Paul is exclaiming that people must consider that God is always truthful regardless of what people think. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “let people always know that God is true” or “may people always declare that God is true” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

πᾶς…ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of liar, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “every man lies” (See: Abstract Nouns)

πᾶς…ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης

Paul is leaving out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “let every man be a liar” (See: Ellipsis)

πᾶς…ἄνθρωπος

Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “every person” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

καθὼς γέγραπται

See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

καθὼς γέγραπται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by David, a king of Israel. Alternate translation: “just as King David wrote” (See: Active or Passive)

ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε

This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 51:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

ὅπως

So that indicates that what follows is the result of what David had written previously in Psalm 51:4, which is about how David had sinned. Paul assumes that his readers would be familiar with the earlier part of that verse. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have sinned so that” or “Because of my sin” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε

In this sentence, you and your refer to God and are singular. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: Forms of You)

δικαιωθῇς…ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people would acknowledge how righteous you are … when people attempt to judge you” or “you would prove yourself to be righteous … when others try to judge you” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου

Paul records David using words figuratively to describe the things that God said by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in what you say” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 3:5

εἰ δὲ

But here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. In this verse, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement that Paul made in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If indeed that is true” or “Now if” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?

In these sentences Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: Quote Markings)

εἰ…ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν?

Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument that an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God. Then what will we say” (See: Connect — Hypothetical Conditions)

ἡμῶν…ἐροῦμεν

Here, our and we are used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Jewish … will we Jews say” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind unrighteousness and righteousness in another way. Alternate translation: “how unrighteous we are … how righteous God is” (See: Abstract Nouns)

μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?

In this sentence Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question here to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. This sentence is also the answer to the hypothetical question that precedes it. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God certainly cannot be unrighteousness for imposing his wrath!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

εἰ…ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?

If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine the hypothetical conditional statement of the first sentence with the rhetorical question of the second sentence. Alternate translation: “if our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God, then we certainly cannot say that God is unrighteousness for imposing his wrath!” (See: Information Structure)

τὴν ὀργήν

Here Paul uses wrath figuratively to refer to the outcome of God’s wrath, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of wrath in 1:18. (See: Metonymy)

(κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.)

Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to show that he is not trying to challenge the righteousness of God. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “I am reasoning like a human being” (See: Aside)

(κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.)

Here, the phrase according to men is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I speak based on how human beings perceive things” or “I speak according to mere human reasoning”(See: Idiom)

Romans 3:6

μὴ γένοιτο

See how you translated this in verse 4. (See: Exclamations)

ἐπεὶ πῶς κρινεῖ ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον

Here Paul is giving the reason why God is “not unrighteous for imposing his wrath,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for expressing the reason why someone does something. Alternate translation: “Because if God were unrighteous, how would he judge the world” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

πῶς κρινεῖ ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον

In this clause Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question here to emphasize that God could not judge the world if he were unrighteous. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God certainly could not judge the world!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὸν κόσμον

Here Paul uses world figuratively to refer to the people who live in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people in the world” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 3:7

In verses 7–9, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement Paul made in verse 6. A note will inform you of the one parenthetic statement within these verses in which Paul interjects his own voice into the argument.

εἰ δὲ

But here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. In this verse, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement Paul made in the previous verse. See how you translated this in verse 5. (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

εἰ…ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι

Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose the truth of God through my life abounds to his glory. Then why am I still being judged as a sinner” (See: Connect — Hypothetical Conditions)

εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But if the truth of God abounds to his glory through my lie” (See: Information Structure)

ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “how truthful God is” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the truth that characterizes God. Use a natural way in your language to communicate this idea. Alternate translation: “God’s truthfulness” (See: Possession)

ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι…κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς

Here Paul uses the pronoun my and I to refer to a Jewish person who might give this hypothetical response. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternative translation: “when we Jews act falsely … are we … as sinners” or “when we Jews lie … are we … as sinners” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of lie, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “when I act falsely” or “when I lie” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ

Here, to indicates that this is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “with the result that he is glorified” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “to demonstrate how glorious he is” or “to glorify him” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι

In this clause Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse, which was also repeated in the previous clause. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “surely I should not still be judged as a sinner!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἔτι κἀγὼ…κρίνομαι

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “does God still judge me” or “should God still keep on judging me” (See: Active or Passive)

ἁμαρτωλὸς

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sinner, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “someone who sins” or “as if I were sinful” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 3:8

καὶ

And here indicates that in this verse Paul continues speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement he made in verse 6. If it would help your readers, you could state this with a fuller expression. Alternate translation: “Furthermore” or “In addition” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

καὶ μὴ καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν, ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά?

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “And not, ‘Let us do evil, so that good may come,’ just as we are blasphemed and just as some affirm we say?” (See: Information Structure)

καὶ μὴ

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And why not say” (See: Ellipsis)

μὴ…ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά

In this sentence Paul is not asking for information, but is using an elided question here to emphasize that God could not judge the world if he were unrighteous. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you should say … ‘Let us do the evil things, so that the good things may come!’” (See: Rhetorical Question)

καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν

Paul is saying this as an aside in order to show that people have been falsely accusing him of teaching that people should sin in order to show how good God is. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “Some people blaspheme us and affirm that we are saying such things” (See: Aside)

βλασφημούμεθα…ἡμᾶς

When Paul says we and us, he could be (1) speaking only of himself in a formal manner. Alternate translation: “I am blasphemed … me” (2) speaking of himself and all other Christians. Alternate translation: “we Christians are blasphemed … us” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

βλασφημούμεθα

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people blaspheme us” (See: Active or Passive)

μὴ καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν, ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “not say (just as we are blasphemed and just as some affirm us to say) that we should do the evil things” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν

Paul is saying this as an aside in order to show that the people who have been falsely accusing him of teaching people to “do the evil things, so that the good things may come” deserve to be judged by God. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. (See: Aside)

ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν

The pronoun whose here refers to the people who slander Paul by claiming that he teaches people to “do the evil things, so that the good things may come.” If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the judgment of those who say this is just” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who are justly judged” or “whom God justly judges” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 3:9

τί οὖν? προεχόμεθα?

Here Paul concludes his series of rhetorical questions by using the same phrase What then. See how you translated this phrase in verse 1. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

προεχόμεθα?

Paul is using the question form to express the objection that a Jew might have to what Paul has said previously. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely we are not better off!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

προεχόμεθα

Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and his fellow Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Are we Jews better off” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

οὐ πάντως

Not at all is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong negative response to the previous statement. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “Absolutely not!” or “In no way!” (See: Exclamations)

οὐ πάντως

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “We are not better off at all” (See: Ellipsis)

προῃτιασάμεθα γὰρ

For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “We are not better off because we have already accused” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

προῃτιασάμεθα

Here, we could mean: (1) Paul is speaking only of himself in a formal manner. Alternate translation: “I have already accused” (2) Paul is speaking of himself and other Christians. Alternate translation: “we Christians have already accused” See how you translated we in the previous verse. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Ἕλληνας

Here, Greeks refers to non-Jewish people in general. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “non-Jewish people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὑφ’ ἁμαρτίαν

The phrase under sin is an idiom that means “under the power of sin” or “controlled by one’s desire to sin.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “controlled by sin” or “ruled by sin” (See: Idiom)

Romans 3:10

In verses 10–18 Paul uses Old Testament quotations as a repetitive series of sentences in order to show how evil all types of people are. In verses 10–12 he emphasizes the general nature of their evil conduct by repeating the word none four times, and the phrase not even one twice. In verses 13–18 he uses specific examples of their evil conduct. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of the accusations against humanity. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done wrong. (See: Litany)

καθὼς γέγραπται

See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

καθὼς γέγραπται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “just as the prophets wrote” (See: Active or Passive)

οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς

This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of Psalm 14:3. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that not even one type of person is righteous. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one type of person who is righteous” or “Absolutely no one who is righteous” (See: Parallelism)

οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς

Paul is using the singular adjectives none righteous and one as nouns in order to describe all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “There are no righteous people, not any people” or “There is no righteous person, not even one person” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 3:11

οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων; οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν

This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of Psalm 14:2 and Psalm 53:3. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

οὐκ ἔστιν…οὐκ ἔστιν

Paul is using the adjectives none as nouns in order to describe all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “There are no people … There are no people” or “There is no person … There is no person” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων

Here, who understands refers to someone who is able to think wisely or correctly. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “There is none who is wise” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν

Her, Paul quotes David usingseeks figuratively to describe people attempting to know God as if God were lost and people needed to find him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who attempts to know God” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 3:12

πάντες ἐξέκλιναν, ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν; οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός

This sentence is quotation of Psalm 14:3 and Psalm 53:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

ἐξέκλιναν

Paul quotes David using turned away figuratively to describe these people as if they had left a path that leads to where God is. David means that they refuse to live according to God’s rules. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “refuse to live the way God requires” (See: Metaphor)

ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν

Here, useless implies that these sinful people are so sinful that they do not benefit God or humankind. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “They together became worthless for benefitting anyone” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that not even one type of person can continually do kindness. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one type of person who does kindness” or “Absolutely no one who is doing kindness” (See: Parallelism)

οὐκ…ἑνός

See how you translated none and one in verse 10. (See: Nominal Adjectives)

χρηστότητα

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of kindness, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “what is kind” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 3:13

τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν

These two sentences are a quotation from Psalm 5:10. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν; ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν

These three sentences mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing three times, in slightly different ways, to show how harmful the words are that these people say. If saying the same thing three times might confuse your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The things they say are deadly, deceptive, and damaging” (See: Parallelism)

ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν

Paul quotes David speaking of these people’s throats in general, not of one particular throat. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “throats” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν

Here Paul quotes David using throat figuratively to describe something people would say by using their throats to say it. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What they say” (See: Metonymy)

τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν

Paul quotes David using opened grave figuratively to describe these people’s throat as if it were a deep hole containing rotting corpses. He means that the things these people say are morally corrupt and offend God. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Their throats express moral corruption” (See: Metaphor)

ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν

Here Paul quotes David using tongues figuratively to describe something people would say to deceive someone by using their tongues to say it. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with what they say” (See: Metonymy)

ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν

This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 140:3. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

ἰὸς ἀσπίδων

Paul is using the possessive form to describe poison that comes from asps, which are venomous snakes. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Asp’s poison” (See: Possession)

ἰὸς ἀσπίδων

Paul quotes David using poison of asps figuratively to refer to what people say as if what they say contained poison. He means that the things they say harm people like deadly venom. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “What hurts people like a poisonous snake bite” or “Speech that hurts people” (See: Metaphor)

ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν

Here Paul quotes David using lips figuratively to describe something people would say to harm someone by using their lips to say it. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by what they say” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 3:14

ὧν τὸ στόμα ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει

This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 10:7. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

τὸ στόμα

Paul quotes David speaking of these people’s mouths in general, not of one particular mouth. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “mouths” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

ὧν τὸ στόμα

Here Paul quotes David using mouth figuratively to describe people speaking curses and bitter things by using their mouth to say them. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what they say” (See: Metonymy)

ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει

Paul quotes David using cursing and bitterness figuratively as if these concepts were thins with which people could fill or load their mouth. He means that these people habitually curse and say bitter things against others. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “habitually curses and says bitter things against others” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 3:15

Verses 15–17 are Paul’s paraphrase of Isaiah 59:7–8. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

οἱ πόδες αὐτῶν

Paul quotes Isaiah using feet, a part of the human body, to refer to the whole person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “These people” (See: Synecdoche)

ἐκχέαι αἷμα

Paul quotes Isaiah using pour out blood figuratively to refer to violently murdering people, which usually causes blood to come out of the people who are murdered. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to murder others” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 3:16

σύντριμμα καὶ ταλαιπωρία

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of Destruction and suffering, you could express the same ideas with other expressions. Alternate translation: “They demolish lives and make people suffer” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν

Here, ways is an idiom meaning “wherever they go” or “how they behave.” It refers to a person’s daily life. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “characterize how they behave” (See: Idiom)

Romans 3:17

ὁδὸν

See how you translated “ways” in the previous verse. (See: Idiom)

ὁδὸν εἰρήνης

Paul is using the possessive form to describe a way that is characterized by peace. He means that these people do not understand how to live peacefully. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a peaceful way” or “a peaceful way to behave” (See: Possession)

Romans 3:18

οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν

This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 36:1. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of fear, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “They are not afraid of God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

φόβος Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe fear that people should feel toward for God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “fear for God” (See: Possession)

ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν

Here,before their eyes is an idiom that refers to thinking about something. Paul means that these people do not think at all about how terrifying God is. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in their minds” (See: Idiom)

Romans 3:19

δὲ

Now here indicates that what follows summarizes Paul’s teachings about the law and “the righteousness of God” in verses 1–9. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Indeed” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

οἴδαμεν

Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jews know” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ὅσα ὁ νόμος λέγει…λαλεῖ

Here Paul speaks of the law figuratively as if it were a person who could speak. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as many things as God says in the law, he speaks” (See: Personification)

ὁ νόμος…τῷ νόμῳ

Here Paul uses the law figuratively to refer to the entire Old Testament, which includes the law. Here he is not referring to only the Law of Moses, as he did earlier in the chapter. We know this because in verses 10–18 Paul quoted verses from parts of the Old Testament that are not in the Law of Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures … the Scriptures” (See: Metonymy)

τοῖς ἐν τῷ νόμῳ

Paul uses those with the law to refer to the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated a similar phrase in 2:12. Alternative translation: “to Jews” or “to those who know the law” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα

Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for what the law says. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

πᾶν στόμα φραγῇ

Here, every mouth may be shut is an idiom that means “no one can say anything to excuse themselves.” Paul means that no one can defend themselves before God because everyone has sinned. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no human beings can excuse themselves” (See: Idiom)

φραγῇ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may stop talking” (See: Active or Passive)

πᾶς ὁ κόσμος

Paul usesall the world figuratively to refer to all the people living in the world. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the people in the world” (See: Synecdoche)

ὑπόδικος γένηται…τῷ Θεῷ

The phrase may become accountable to God means that God will judge everyone at the final judgment according to how they lived their lives. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God would judge all the people in the world as guilty” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 3:20

διότι

Here. because introduces a reason clause. Paul is stating the reason why all humanity is “accountable to God,” as stated in the previous verse. Use natural way in your language to indicate a reason clause. You may need to begin a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” or “As a result” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σὰρξ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will not justify any flesh” or “God will not make any flesh righteous” (See: Active or Passive)

σὰρξ

Paul uses flesh figuratively to refer to a human being, who is made of flesh. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “human being” (See: Synecdoche)

ἐξ ἔργων νόμου…διὰ…νόμου ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας

In this verse Paul speaks of the law figuratively as if it were a person who could justify someone or give them full awareness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires in his law … God gives full awareness of sin through his law” (See: Personification)

ἐξ ἔργων νόμου

See how you translated a similar phrase in 2:15. (See: Possession)

νόμου…νόμου

In this verse law is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. It does not refer to the entire Old Testament, as in the previous verse. See how you translated this use of law in 2:12. (See: Collective Nouns)

ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ

Here, before him is an idiom meaning “in his presence” or “from his perspective.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in his presence” or “before his judgment seat” (See: Idiom)

ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of full awareness and sin, you could express the same ideas in different way. Alternate translation: “fully aware of being sinful” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας

Paul is using the possessive form to describe full awareness about the sin a person has committed. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “full knowledge about sin” (See: Possession)

διὰ…νόμου

Here, through law indicates the means by which a person becomes fully aware of sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of law” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 3:21

νυνὶ δὲ

But now here indicates that what follows is in contrast to Paul’s discussion about the law in 2:1–3:20. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Yet now” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

νυνὶ δὲ χωρὶς νόμου, δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But now, the righteousness of God has been made known apart from the law” (See: Information Structure)

νόμου…τοῦ νόμου

While the first occurrence of the law in this verse refers to the laws that God gave the Jews through Moses, the second occurrence refers to the first five books in the Old Testament that were written by Moses. The ULT shows this different by using the law and the Law respectively. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the laws God gave Israel … the part of Scripture that Moses wrote” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

χωρὶς νόμου

Here, apart from the law could mean: (1) apart from doing what the law requires. Alternate translation: “without having to do what the law requires” (2) outside of what the law says. Alternate translation: “not related to what the law says” or “differently than what the law says” (See: Possession)

δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has made his righteousness visible” or “God has revealed his righteousness” (See: Active or Passive)

δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ

See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: Possession)

μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Law and the Prophets bearing witness” (See: Active or Passive)

μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν

Here Paul uses the Law and the Prophets figuratively as if they were people who could witness or testify in a courtroom. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what God says in the Law and the Prophets is a written testimony to this” (See: Personification)

ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν

Paul is using the name of two parts of the Hebrew Scriptures, the Law and the Prophets, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your Scriptures” (See: Synecdoche)

Romans 3:22

δὲ

Here, but indicates that what follows explains how a person receives “the righteousness of God”. It does not indicate a contrast. Alternate translation: “namely,” or “even” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

δικαιοσύνη…Θεοῦ

See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: Possession)

διὰ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Here, faith in Jesus Christ is a possessive form that indicates faith that is associated with Jesus Christ. This could refer to: (1) trust in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “by trusting in Jesus Christ” or “by believing in Jesus Christ” (2) the faithfulness of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “through the faithfulness that Jesus Christ possesses” or “through how faithful Jesus Christ is” (See: Possession)

τοὺς πιστεύοντας

Paul is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “those who believe in him” or “those who believe in Jesus for salvation” (See: Ellipsis)

γάρ

Here, for introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why the righteousness of God is for all those who believe. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something is true. Alternate translation: “because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

οὐ…ἐστιν διαστολή

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of distinction, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “God does not discriminate” or “God is not partial” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 3:23

γὰρ

For here introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why “there is no distinction,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something is true. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

πάντες

Here Paul uses the adjective all as a noun that refers to all the people who have existed or will exist. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ὑστεροῦνται τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul speaks figuratively of all people as if they were something that fails to reach its destination. He means that they lack or do not attain the glory of God. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “lack the glory of God” or “fail to attain the glory of God” (See: Metaphor)

τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here the possessive form the glory of God could refer to: (1) the glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned. Alternate translation: “the glory God once gave them” or “the glory from God” (2) glorifying God, as in the similar phrase “the glory of the imperishable God” in 1:23. Alternate translation: “of glorifying God” (See: Possession)

Romans 3:24

δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι

Here, grace is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could justify someone. Paul means that God graciously makes people righteous as a gift. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and are gifted with becoming righteous because God is gracious” (See: Personification)

δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν

Paul assumes that his readers know that those who are being justified freely are “all” those who “have sinned” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all people are being freely justified” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δωρεὰν

Alternate translation: “as a gift” or “without payment”

τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι, διὰ τῆς ἀπολυτρώσεως τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and redemption, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “by God being gracious through redeeming them in Christ Jesus” or “due to how kind God is, because Christ Jesus redeemed them” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀπολυτρώσεως

The word translated as redemption refers to rescuing someone from captivity by paying a ransom. Your language may require you to indicate what the people are redeemed from. This could mean: (1) Jesus redeems people from eternal punishment. Alternative translation: “redemption from eternal punishment” (2) Jesus redeems people from being enslaved to sin. Alternative translation: “redemption from enslavement to sin” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

Here, Paul speaks figuratively of redemption as if it were an object that could be inside Jesus. Paul means that God redeemed all people who believe in Jesus by uniting them to Christ Jesus. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that comes through union with Christ Jesus” or “that is through being united to Christ Jesus” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 3:25

ὃν προέθετο ὁ Θεὸς ἱλαστήριον

Here Paul uses presented figuratively as if Jesus were an Old Testament atonement sacrifice that was presented to God in the temple. He means that Jesus’ death was a sacrifice for the sins of humankind. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “whom God offered to atone for the sins of humanity” (See: Metaphor)

ἱλαστήριον, διὰ πίστεως…εἰς ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of propitiation, faith, demonstration, or righteousness, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “to atone for people’s sins by trusting … to demonstrate how he makes people righteous” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ αἵματι

Here Paul uses his blood figuratively to refer to Jesus’ death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in Christ’s death” (See: Metonymy)

εἰς ἔνδειξιν

Here, for indicates that the phrase that follows is the purpose for which God presented Jesus as a propitiation. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to demonstrate” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ

See how you translated “the righteousness of God” in 1:17. (See: Possession)

διὰ τὴν πάρεσιν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of overlooking, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “because he overlooked” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τῶν προγεγονότων ἁμαρτημάτων

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sin, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “how they had sinned previously” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 3:26

ἐν

Here, in introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason for God “overlooking of the sins that happened previously,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something is true. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of forbearance, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “because God is so forbearing” or “since God forbears” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe God who is characterized by forbearance. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in God’s forbearance” (See: Possession)

πρὸς τὴν ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ

See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: Possession)

ἐν τῷ νῦν καιρῷ

Alternate translation: “at this time in history” or “currently”

εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν

Here, so that indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God now demonstrates his righteousness. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that he would be” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

τὸν ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ

Paul is speaking of all people who have faith in Jesus, not one particular person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “anyone who is from faith in Jesus” or “every person who trusts in Jesus”(See: Generic Noun Phrases)

τὸν ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ

Here Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who is characterized by faith in Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who is characterized by faith in Jesus” (See: Possession)

πίστεως Ἰησοῦ

See how you translated this phrase in verse 22. (See: Possession)

Romans 3:27

In verses 27–31 Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions and answers in order to emphasize that God alone makes people righteous through faith in Jesus. Like in verses 1–9, Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew when he asks the rhetorical questions, but he is speaking as himself when he answers those questions.

οὖν

Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in verses 21–26. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If it is God who makes people righteous through faith in Jesus, then where is” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις?

Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question here to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in verses 21–26. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There then is no grounds for boasting!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις

Here Paul speaks figuratively of boasting as if it were an object that could be in a location. He means that no one can boast because only God makes people righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Then can anyone boast” (See: Metaphor)

ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of boasting, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “Who then can boast” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐξεκλείσθη

In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical question in the previous sentence. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘It is excluded!’” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐξεκλείσθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has excluded it” or “God does not allow it” (See: Active or Passive)

διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων?…διὰ νόμου πίστεως

Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Through what kind of law is a person made righteous? Is a person made righteous through the works of the law? … a person made righteous through a law of faith” (See: Ellipsis)

διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων?

In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous sentence and in verses 21–26. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely through a kind of law! Surely through the works!” or “Surely a person is made righteous through a kind of law! Surely a person is made righteous through works!”(See: Rhetorical Question)

τῶν ἔργων?

Paul is using the possessive form to describe a law that is characterized by works. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Through a law characterized by works?” or “By doing what the law requires?” (See: Possession)

οὐχί, ἀλλὰ διὰ νόμου πίστεως

In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous two sentences. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘No! But through a law of faith.’” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐχί

No! is an exclamation that communicates a strong contrast to the previous statement. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Not at all!” (See: Exclamations)

διὰ νόμου πίστεως

Paul is using the possessive form to describe a law that is characterized by faith. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “through a law characterized by faith” or “by doing what faith requires” (See: Possession)

πίστεως

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “of trusting in God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 3:28

γὰρ

For here indicates that what follows explains what “the law of faith” means in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

λογιζόμεθα

Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Christian Jews, as indicated in verse 9. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we believing Jews consider” or “we believing Jews regard” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἄνθρωπον

Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word here in the generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “humankind” or “a person” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

δικαιοῦσθαι…ἄνθρωπον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “that God justifies a man” or “that God makes a man righteous” (See: Active or Passive)

πίστει

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “by believing in Jesus” (See: Abstract Nouns)

χωρὶς ἔργων νόμου

See how you translated “apart from the law” in verse 21. (See: Possession)

ἔργων νόμου

Paul is using the possessive form to refer to the works that God requires in the law. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the works that the law requires” (See: Possession)

Romans 3:29

ἢ

Or here indicates that the next two sentences are the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Or you Jews might say” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν? ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν

Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Is he not also God of Gentiles? Yes, he is also God of Gentiles” (See: Ellipsis)

ἐθνῶν…ἐθνῶν

See how you translated this word in 1:5. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ἰουδαίων ὁ Θεὸς μόνον? οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν?

Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God is surely not only the God of Jews! He is surely also the God of Gentiles!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν

In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous two sentences. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘Yes, also of Gentiles’” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ναὶ

Yes is an exclamation word that communicates enthusiasm. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating enthusiasm. Alternate translation (change the period to an exclamation point): “Of course!” (See: Exclamations)

Romans 3:30

εἴπερ

Paul uses if as if the rest of the verse were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since we know” or “Because it is true that” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

εἴπερ

This phrase introduces the reason why Paul could say in the previous verse that God is also the God of the Gentiles. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “since, indeed” or “we know this is true because, indeed” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

εἷς ὁ Θεός

Paul speaks figuratively of God as if he were a number. He means that God is the one and only true God for both Jews and Gentiles. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “there is only one God” (See: Metaphor)

ὃς δικαιώσει περιτομὴν ἐκ πίστεως, καὶ ἀκροβυστίαν διὰ τῆς πίστεως

This phrase gives us further information about who God is. It is not making a distinction between the one true God and false gods. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is the one who will justify the circumcision by faith, and the uncircumcision through the same faith” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

περιτομὴν…ἀκροβυστίαν

The words circumcision and uncircumcision are singular nouns that refers to groups of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the circumcised people … the uncircumcised people” (See: Collective Nouns)

περιτομὴν…ἀκροβυστίαν

Here Paul uses the circumcision figuratively to refer to the Jews by associating them with circumcision, and he uses the uncircumcision figuratively to refer to the Gentiles by associating them with uncircumcision. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people … the non-Jewish people” (See: Metonymy)

ἐκ πίστεως…διὰ τῆς πίστεως

See how you translated this phrase in verse 26. (See: Possession)

Romans 3:31

νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν

Here, then indicates that this sentence is the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then you Jews might say, ‘Do we nullify the law’” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν διὰ τῆς πίστεως

Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express the response that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we surely nullify the law through the same faith!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὖν καταργοῦμεν

Here, we is used exclusively to speak of the unbelieving Jews whom Paul is speaking on behalf of. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Do we Jews then nullify” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν

Here, nullify the law means to make the law useless or no longer applicable to anyone. Paul is stating that the Jews might worry that he is teaching that the Law of Moses does not have any function at all because God makes people righteous by faith. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do we make the law useless” or “Do we throw away the law” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

διὰ τῆς πίστεως

See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: Possession)

μὴ γένοιτο! ἀλλὰ νόμον ἱστάνομεν

In these two sentences Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous sentence. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be! Instead, we establish the law’” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

μὴ γένοιτο

See how you translated this phrase in verse 6. (See: Exclamations)

νόμον ἱστάνομεν

Here, we is used exclusively to refer to Paul and other Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Christians uphold the law” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

νόμον ἱστάνομεν

Paul uses uphold figuratively to refer to the law as if it were an object that people could hold up high. The meaning of uphold here is the opposite meaning of nullify earlier in the verse. It could mean: (1) Christians fulfill the requirements of the law by trusting in Jesus, who fulfilled the law for them. Alternate translation: “we fulfill the law by faith” (2) Christians value the law and affirm that it is useful. Alternative translation: “we confirm that the law is useful” or “we affirm that the law has value”(See: Metaphor)

Romans 4

Romans 4 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21)
   • God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26)
   • No one can boast in works (3:27–31)
   • The examples of Abraham and David (4:1–25)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 7–8 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

The purpose of the law of Moses

In this chapter Paul continues to develop his argument based on what he wrote in the previous chapter. He explains how God made Abraham, the ancestor of all Jews, righteous a long time before God gave the Jews the Law of Moses. Even Abraham could not become righteous by what he did. Rather, God made Abraham righteous on the basis of Abraham’s faith. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person righteous. People have always become righteous only by faith. (See: just, justice, unjust, injustice, justify, justification and law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God and faith)

Circumcision

Circumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, being circumcised never made anyone righteous. In this chapter Paul uses “circumcision” to refer to Jews and “uncircumcision” to refer to non-Jews. (See: circumcise, circumcised, circumcision, uncircumcised, uncircumcision and covenant)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Rhetorical Questions

In verses 1, 3, and 9–10 Paul continues using rhetorical questions like he did in the previous chapter. He does this in order to answer objections that Jews might make about what he is saying.

Romans 4:1

Verses 1–12 are a series of rhetorical questions and answers that Paul uses to emphasize that even Abraham, the ancestor of the Jewish people, was made righteous by God “through faith.”

τί οὖν

Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 3:27–31. See how you translated What then in 3:1. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα?

In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 3:27–31. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that Abraham, our forefather according to the flesh, has surely discovered something!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα?

In this verse and the first part of the next verse, Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: Quote Markings)

ἐροῦμεν

In verses 1–9 Paul uses we exclusively to speak of himself and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “will we Jews say” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “that Abraham has discovered, who is our forefather according to the flesh” (See: Information Structure)

κατὰ σάρκα

See how you translated according to the flesh in 1:3. (See: Idiom)

Romans 4:2

εἰ γὰρ Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα

These clauses continue the the statements that a Jew might have to against Paul that began in the previous verse. You may need to indicate this with a closing quotation mark at the end of these clauses or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

γὰρ

For here indicates that what follows is a the reason for the statement in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This must be the case because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

εἰ…Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα

Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that the unbelieving Jew might think that this is actually true. In Paul’s time some Jewish teachers taught that Abraham had a right to boast because of his faith. However, since translating this as if it were true might confuse your readers, it is best to use a hypothetical sentence, as in the UST. (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

Ἀβραὰμ…ἐδικαιώθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God justified Abraham” or “God made Abraham right with himself” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐξ ἔργων

Paul assumes that his readers would understand that worksmeans “works of the law” as in 3:28. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires from his people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν

In this clause Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous clauses and previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘But not before God!’” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν.

What follows the word but here is an emphatic contrast to what was just stated. Paul is negating the argument that he presented earlier in this verse and in the previous verse. You could make this emphasis explicit by replacing the period with an exclamation point or another natural way in your language for introducing am emphatic contrast. Alternate translation: “but certainly not before God!” or “however not from God’s perspective!” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

πρὸς Θεόν

Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham as if he were located in the presence of God. He means that Abraham could not boast to God about his righteousness if it was righteous by works. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “from God’s perspective” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 4:3

γὰρ

For here indicates that what follows in this verse is the reason why Paul said in the previous verse that Abraham cannot boast “before God.” Use a natural way in your language to introduce a reason clause. Alternative translation: “This is true because” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τί…ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει

Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the scripture surely says” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί…ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει

Here Paul uses say figuratively as if the scripture were a person who could speak. He means that the scripture he is about to quote contains information related to the topic he is discussing. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what information is in the scripture” (See: Personification)

τί…ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει?

Here Paul uses what does the scripture say to indicate a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 15:6). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what is written in the scripture” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ἡ Γραφὴ

Here, the scripture refers specifically to the quotation from Genesis 15:6 that follows in this verse. It does not refer to the Scriptures in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the scripture that Moses wrote in Genesis” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God counted it to him as righteousness” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐλογίσθη

The pronoun it refers to Abraham’s faith, which was implied by the statement that Abraham believed God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his faith was counted” or “his trust in God was counted” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 4:4

δὲ

Now here indicates that what follows in verses 4–5 is an explanation of the scripture quotation in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Certainly” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

τῷ…ἐργαζομένῳ

Here, the one who works refers to a hypothetical person who obeys the laws God gave through Moses and is “made righteous by works” (see verse 2). However, since the meaning of verses 4–5 is given in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ὁ μισθὸς οὐ λογίζεται κατὰ χάριν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he does not consider his wage as grace” or “he does not regard his pay as grace” (See: Active or Passive)

κατὰ χάριν…κατὰ ὀφείλημα

Alternate translation: “as a matter of grace … as a matter of obligation” or “as a gift … as an obligation”

κατὰ χάριν…κατὰ ὀφείλημα

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of grace and obligation, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “as what is gracious … as what is owed” or “something gifted … something owed” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 4:5

δὲ

Now here indicates that what follows in this verse is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse. Use natural way in your language to express contrasting ideas. Alternate translation: “But” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

τῷ…μὴ ἐργαζομένῳ

Here, the one who does not work refers to a person who does not obey the laws God gave through Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the one who is does not obey God’s laws” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν δικαιοῦντα

Here, the one who makes righteous refers to God. If this would your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who justifies” or “God who makes righteous” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν ἀσεβῆ

Paul is using the singular adjective phrase the ungodly as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are ungodly” or “people who do ungodly things” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

λογίζεται ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. See how you translated a similar phrase in verse 3. Alternate translation: “God counted his faith as righteousness” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of faith and righteousness, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “how he trusts … as being righteous” or “how he trusts in God … as being right with God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 4:6

καὶ Δαυεὶδ λέγει

Paul uses David also speaks of here to introduce a scripture quotation from Psalm 31:1–2, which King David wrote. This occurs in verses 7–8. If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “David also wrote in the Old Testament” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of blessedness, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how blessed the man is” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the man that is characterized by blessedness. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the blessed man” or “the happy man” (See: Possession)

τοῦ ἀνθρώπου

Paul is speaking of people in general, not of one particular man. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

ᾧ ὁ Θεὸς λογίζεται δικαιοσύνην χωρὶς ἔργων

This phrase gives us further information about the the man. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the man God counts as righteous apart from works” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with himself” (See: Abstract Nouns)

χωρὶς ἔργων

See how you translated this phrase in 3:28. (See: Possession)

Romans 4:7

μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι

This verse is the beginning of a quotation from Psalm 31:1–2. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι

These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how Blessed these people are. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “How blessed are those people whom God forgives completely for all their sins” (See: Parallelism)

ὧν…αἱ ἀνομίαι…ὧν…αἱ ἁμαρτίαι

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of lawless deeds and sins, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless things they have done … the sins they have committed” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀφέθησαν…ἐπεκαλύφθησαν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God forgives … God covers” (See: Active or Passive)

ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι

Paul quotes David leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “blessed are those whose sins have been covered” (See: Ellipsis)

ἐπεκαλύφθησαν

Paul quotes David using covered figuratively to refer to God forgiving sins as if he covers sins so that he no longer sees them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have been forgiven” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 4:8

μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν

The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from Psalm 31:1–2. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν

This verse means the same thing as the two clauses in the previous verse. Paul the same thing here, in a slightly different way, to emphasize how Blessed people are home God forgives for their sins. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “How truly blessed is a man whose sin the Lord does certainly not count!” (See: Parallelism)

ἀνὴρ

Paul quotes David speaking of people in general, not of one particular man. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

ἁμαρτίαν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sin, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “sinful deeds” (See: Abstract Nouns)

οὐ μὴ λογίσηται

Paul quotes David using count figuratively to refer to God remembering or regarding people’s sins after he has forgiven them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “does certainly not regard” (See: Metaphor)

οὐ μὴ

The phrase certainly not translates two negative words in Greek. Paul quotes David using them together to emphasize how certain it is that God does not regard people’s sin after he has forgiven them. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “never” (See: Double Negatives)

Romans 4:9

οὖν

Then here introduces a result clause. This verse indicates the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in verses 6–8. Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “As a result,” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὁ μακαρισμὸς…οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν, ἢ καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν?

Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “this blessedness is surely upon the circumcision and also upon the uncircumcision!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὁ μακαρισμὸς…οὗτος

Here, this blessedness refers to joyful state of those people whom God forgives and makes righteous, as mentioned in verses 6–8. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “is this blessed state of being forgiven by God” or “is this blessed forgiveness from God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ μακαρισμὸς…οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν…ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν

Paul speaks of blessedness figuratively as if it were an object that could be put upon someone. He means that both circumcised and uncircumcised people can receive the blessing of forgiveness from God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is this blessedness given to the circumcision … to the uncircumcision” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν περιτομὴν…τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν

See how you translated these words in 3:30. (See: Collective Nouns)

γάρ

For here indicates that what follows answers the rhetorical question. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

λέγομεν

Here Paul uses we exclusively to refer to Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jewish people say” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

λέγομεν

Paul uses we say here to introduce a modified scripture quotation from Genesis 15:6, which Moses wrote. If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “we say what Moses wrote in the Old Testament” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

ἐλογίσθη τῷ Ἀβραὰμ ἡ πίστις εἰς δικαιοσύνην

See how you translated the similar clauses in verses 3 and 5. (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 4:10

πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη? ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ?

In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to emphasize that Abraham was made righteous without being circumcised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. You may need to combine these sentences. Alternate translation: “Then you surely know how it was counted to him! You surely know whether it was in circumcision or in uncircumcision!” or “Then you surely know how it was counted to him, whether in circumcision or in uncircumcision!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

πῶς οὖν

Here, then introduces a result clause that is in the form of a rhetorical question. Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “How as a result” or “So then how” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

πῶς

How here means “in what circumstances.” Paul is not asking how God made Abraham righteous, but is asking whether or not Abraham was circumcised when God made him righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “In what circumstances” (See: Idiom)

ἐλογίσθη…οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ

In this verse the pronoun it refers to Abraham’s faith, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was Abraham’s faith counted … His faith was not in circumcision” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “How then did God count it” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ

Here Paul is leaving out some the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Was it counted being in circumcision, or in uncircumcision? It was not counted in circumcision, but in uncircumcision” (See: Ellipsis)

ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of circumcision and uncircumcision, you could express the same ideas in verbal way. Paul implies that Abraham is the subject of these sentences. Alternate translation: “While Abraham was circumcised, or while he was uncircumcised? It was not while he was circumcised, but while he was uncircumcised” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 4:11

περιτομῆς…ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ…δι’ ἀκροβυστίας

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of circumcision and uncircumcision, you could express the same ideas in verbal way. Alternate translation: “of being circumcised … while being uncircumcised … through being uncircumcised” (See: Abstract Nouns)

σημεῖον…περιτομῆς

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the sign that is circumcision. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the sign that is circumcision” (See: Possession)

σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως τῆς ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ

This phrase gives us further information about the sign of circumcision. Circumcision is not only a sign, but also a seal. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these clauses clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, a seal of the righteousness of the faith that he had in his uncircumcision” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης

Paul is using the possessive form to describe a seal that proves the righteousness to be real. If this is not clear in your language, you could indicate this with a different form. Alternate translation: “a seal that proves the righteousness” (See: Possession)

τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως

Paul is using the possessive form to describe righteousness that comes from faith. If this is not clear in your language, you could indicate this with an adjective phrase or a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of the righteousness from faith” or “of being right with God that comes from trusting in him” (See: Possession)

τῆς ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ

This clause gives us further information about the faith that Abraham had. Paul is referring to the faith that Abraham had before he was circumcised. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that Abraham had in his uncircumcision” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ

Here Paul speaks figuratively of uncircumcision as if it were a location someone could be in. He means that Abraham was in the state of being uncircumcised. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while he was uncircumcised” (See: Metaphor)

εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν

Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God required Abraham to become circumcised. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that he would be” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

πατέρα πάντων τῶν πιστευόντων δι’ ἀκροβυστίας

Paul uses father figuratively to refer to Abraham as if he physically produced those who believe in God. Paul means that Abraham spiritually represents all uncircumcised non-Jews who trust in God. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “the spiritual representative of all those who believe through uncircumcision” or “like the father of all those who believe through uncircumcision” (See: Metaphor)

δι’ ἀκροβυστίας

Here the word translated as through refers to a going through a time period. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “during uncircumcision” or “throughout the time they were uncircumcised” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὴν δικαιοσύνην

Here, so that indicates that this clause could refer to: (1) the purpose of Abraham being the father of all those who believe. Alternate translation: “in order that the righteousness would be counted to them” (2) the result of Abraham being the father of all those who believe. Alternate translation: “resulting in the righteousness being counted to them” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὴν δικαιοσύνην

See how you translated counted in verses 3–5 and 9–10. (See: Active or Passive)

τὴν δικαιοσύνην

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 4:12

καὶ πατέρα περιτομῆς

Here, and indicates that what follows is another purpose for God commanding Abraham to be circumcised after he trusted in God. If it would be clearer in your language, you could repeat some of the information from the previous sentence and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “and also so that he would be the father of circumcision” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

πατέρα περιτομῆς…τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν

Paul uses father of circumcision here figuratively. He means that Abraham is both the physical ancestor and spiritual ancestor of Jewish people who are both physically circumcised and have the “circumcision of the heart,” which Paul refers to in 2:29. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spiritual representative of those who are physically and spiritually circumcised … our spiritual representative” (See: Possession)

τοῖς οὐκ ἐκ περιτομῆς μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ

Paul assumes that his readers will know that these two clauses refer to those Jews who are not only circumcised in their bodies, but also have the same faith in God that Abraham had before he was circumcised. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those Jews who are not only circumcised, but who also follow in the steps of the faith of our father Abraham in uncircumcision” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς…πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ

Here, follow in the steps is an idiom that means to follow someone’s example. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who follow the example of the faith of our father Abraham” (See: Idiom)

τῆς…πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the faith that our father Abraham had. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of our father Abraham’s faith” (See: Possession)

τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ

Here, our refers to Paul and his fellow believing Jews, as in 3:9. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “of our Jewish father Abraham” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ

Here, in uncircumcision has the same meaning as “through circumcision” stated in the previous verse. See how you translated the phrase there. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 4:13

γὰρ

For here gives the reason why Abraham is the spiritual “father” of both non-Jews and Jews, as stated in verses 11–12. If it would be clearer to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἡ ἐπαγγελία…τὸ κληρονόμον αὐτὸν εἶναι

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of promise and heir, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God promised … that he would inherit” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἢ

Here, the world translated or indicates that the promise is to Abraham and his seed. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and also” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ

Here Paul uses seed figuratively to refer to “offspring.” Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to his descendants” (See: Metaphor)

κόσμου

Here the world could refer to: (1) all the land of the world. Although God had promised to give the land of Canaan to Abraham’s descendants, the Jews in Paul’s time understood that this promise included the whole earth. This will indeed take place when Jesus, a descendent of Abraham, rules over the whole world. Alternate expression: “of all the land in the world” (2) the people who live in the world, as in 3:19. Alternate translation: “of the people who live in the world” (See: Synecdoche)

οὐ…διὰ νόμου…ἀλλὰ διὰ δικαιοσύνης

Here the word translated as through indicates the means by which God gave * the promise*. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was not by means of the law but by means of the righteousness” or “was not on the basis of the law but on the basis of the righteousness” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

νόμου

See how you translated the law in 3:21. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δικαιοσύνης πίστεως

See how you translated the similar phrase in verse 11. (See: Possession)

Romans 4:14

γὰρ

For here indicates that verses 14–15 give the reasons why God’s promise to Abraham was given “through the righteousness of faith” and not “through the law,” as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

εἰ…οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι, κεκένωται ἡ πίστις

Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the serious implications of how people inherit God’s promises. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose the heirs are from the law, then the faith has been emptied” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι…ἡ πίστις…ἡ ἐπαγγελία

See how you translated “heir”, the law, and faith in the previous verse. (See: Abstract Nouns)

κληρονόμοι

Here, heirs refers to “Abraham” and “his seed” from the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heirs, Abraham or his seed, are” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι

Here, from the law refers to those who try to obey the Law of Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heirs are those who try to obey the law” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κεκένωται ἡ πίστις

Paul speaks figuratively of faith as if it were a container that could be emptied. He means that faith would become powerless or useless to make a person righteous if simply obeyingthe law allows a person to inherit God’s promises. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “then it would be impossible to become righteous by trusting in God” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 4:15

γὰρ

For indicates that the rest of the verse gives the reason why inheriting God’s promise by obeying the law would nullify faith and the promise, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be clearer to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὁ…νόμος ὀργὴν κατεργάζεται

Paul speaks figuratively of the law as if it were a person who could produce something. He means that the law causes God to punish people because they cannot obey it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the law results in wrath for those who do not obey it” (See: Personification)

ὀργὴν

See how you translated the same use of this word in 1:18. (See: Metonymy)

οὗ δὲ οὐκ ἔστιν νόμος, οὐδὲ παράβασις

Paul speaks figuratively of the law and transgression as if they were located in a specific place. Here, where means that God’s law exists. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “but where the law is not present, neither is transgression present” or “but in a place where God’s law does not exist, transgression also does not exist” (See: Metaphor)

παράβασις

See how you translated the same use of this word in 2:23. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 4:16

ἐκ πίστεως

Here, it refers to the promise mentioned later in the verse and introduced in verse 13. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise is by faith” (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ἐκ πίστεως

Here, by indicates the means by which someone acquires the promise. If this is not clear in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person acquires God’s promise by faith” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα

This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God makes faith the means for acquiring the promise. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

κατὰ χάριν

Alternate translation: “by grace” or “on the basis of grace”

χάριν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how gracious God is” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰς τὸ εἶναι βεβαίαν, τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν

Here, so that could indicate: (1) a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order for the promise to be certain” (2) a result clause. Alternate translation: “with the result that the promise might be certain” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν

See how you translated this word in verse 13. (See: Abstract Nouns)

παντὶ τῷ σπέρματι

The phrase all the seed is singular but refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “all the descendants” (See: Collective Nouns)

παντὶ τῷ σπέρματι

See how you translated seed in 4:13.(See: Metaphor)

οὐ τῷ ἐκ τοῦ νόμου μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῷ ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ

These clauses give us further information about the phrase all the seed. They distinguish between a seed associated with the law and a seed associated with the faith. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “both from those believers associated with Abraham through the law, and those associated with the faith of Abraham” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

ἐκ τοῦ νόμου

See how you translated this phrase in verse 14. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ

Here, from the faith of Abraham refers to those who trust in God the way Abraham did. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who has the same faith as Abraham” (See: Possession)

ὅς ἐστιν πατὴρ πάντων ἡμῶν

Paul uses father figuratively to refer to Abraham as if he physically produced all human beings. Paul means that Abraham is the physical ancestor of all believing Jews and the spiritual ancestor of all believing non-Jews. If your readers would not understand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who spiritually represents all of us who believe” (See: Metaphor)

πάντων ἡμῶν

Here, us all refers to all the seed and so is inclusive of all believing Jews and non-Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “of all believers in God” or “of all of us who trust in God” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Romans 4:17

καθὼς γέγραπται, ὅτι πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε

Here Paul interrupts the sentence he began in the previous verse and inserts these two clauses in order to support his argument. If this would confuse your readers, you could mark these clauses in a way that shows they are inserted into the middle of a sentence, as in the UST. You could also move these clauses to the end of the verse so that they do not divide the main sentence. (See: Information Structure)

καθὼς γέγραπται

Here Paul uses a quotation from the Old Testament in order to support the statement in the previous verse that Abraham “is the father of us all.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make the relationship between this verse and the previous verse clearer. Alternate translation: “The fact that Abraham is the father of us all is written in the Scriptures” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καθὼς γέγραπται

Here Paul uses just as it is written to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 17:5). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as it is written in the Scriptures” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

καθὼς γέγραπται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by Moses. Alternate translation: “just as Moses wrote” (See: Active or Passive)

πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε

In this clause Paul quotes Genesis 17:5. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: Quote Markings)

τέθεικά σε…ἐπίστευσεν

The pronoun I refers to God, and you and he refer to Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, have appointed you, Abraham, as … Abraham trusted” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν

Paul quotes God using father figuratively to refer to Abraham as if he were going to physically produce children who would comprise many nations. God means that Abraham would become the spiritual ancestor of a large amount of people from many nations who trust in God like Abraham. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the spiritual representative of numerous groups of people” (See: Metaphor)

κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν Θεοῦ,

Here Paul continues the sentence from the previous verse that he had interrupted with the first two clauses in this verse. This clause completes the previous statement from the previous verse, “who is the father of us all.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. You made need to start a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Abraham is the father of us all in the presence of God whom he trusted” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κατέναντι…Θεοῦ

Paul uses in the presence of figuratively to refer to Abraham as if he were physically present with God. Paul means that God personally considers Abraham to represent the believers that come from many nations. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “according to what God thinks” or “in God’s view” (See: Metaphor)

οὗ ἐπίστευσεν…τοῦ ζῳοποιοῦντος τοὺς νεκροὺς, καὶ καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα

These clauses give further information about God. If this might confuse your readers, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer by making new sentences or by another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This is the God whom he trusted. It is this God who makes the dead live and calls the things not existing as existing” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα

Paul speaks figuratively of the things not existing as if God were calling to them. Paul means that God creates things by commanding them to exist, as Moses describes in Genesis 1:3–27. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “summons into being things that did not previously exist” or “by speaking creates things that did not previously exist” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 4:18

ὃς…αὐτὸν…σου

The pronouns who and he and your refer to Abraham, not God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν

Here, against hope is an idiom meaning “what seems hopeless.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “although it seemed hopeless, he believed on the basis of hope” (See: Idiom)

ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hope, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “who hopefully believed although it seemed hopeless” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐπίστευσεν

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “believed in God” or “believed what God had promised” (See: Ellipsis)

εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι αὐτὸν

Here, so that indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the result of Abraham believing on the basis of hope. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “which resulted in him becoming” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν

See how you translated this phrase in verse 17. (See: Metaphor)

τὸ εἰρημένον

Here Paul uses what was said to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 15:5). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what was said in the Scriptures” (See: Quotations and Quote Margins)

τὸ εἰρημένον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was spoken by God. Alternate translation: “what God said” (See: Active or Passive)

οὕτως ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα σου

Paul assumes that his readers would know the rest of what God said in the verse he is quoting (Genesis 15:5). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Look now at the heavens and count the stars, if you are able to count them. So will your seed be” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸ σπέρμα

See how you translated seed in verse 16.(See: Metaphor)

Romans 4:19

καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει, κατενόησεν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σῶμα ἤδη νενεκρωμένον, ἑκατονταετής που ὑπάρχων, καὶ τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “He considered his own body as already having died (being about a hundred years old)—and the deadness of the womb of Sarah—but he was not weakening in the faith” (See: Information Structure)

καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει

Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “And being strengthened in the faith” (See: Litotes)

μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει

Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham’s faith as if it were something that a person could be weakening in. He means that Abraham kept trusting God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not ceasing to trust” (See: Metaphor)

τῇ πίστει

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “in how he trusted God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἤδη νενεκρωμένον

Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham as if he actually thought his body was dead. Paul means that Abraham knew he was too old to produce a child. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “unable to father a child” or “useless for procreating” (See: Metaphor)

ἑκατονταετής που ὑπάρχων

Here Paul provides background information about Abraham’s age to help his readers understand why Abraham considered his own body as already being dead. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “since he was about one hundred years old” (See: Background Information)

τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας

Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “he also considered the deadness of the womb of Sarah” (See: Ellipsis)

τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of deadness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that the womb of Sarah was dead” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας

Paul speaks figuratively of Sarah’s womb as if it were dead. He means that she was unable to conceive children. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “how Sarah was unable to conceive” or “that Sarah could not bear children” (See: Metaphor)

τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας

Paul assumes that his readers would know that Sarah had been unable to become pregnant throughout her life, as described in the Old Testament book of Genesis. This fact makes Abraham’s faith even more amazing. If your readers would be unfamiliar with the story of Abraham and Sarah, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the deadness of the womb of Sarah, since she could never become pregnant before” or “the deadness of the womb of Sarah, which had always been dead” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 4:20

εἰς δὲ τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Abraham did not waver in unbelief about what God promised” (See: Information Structure)

δὲ

But here indicates that what follows emphasizes Abraham’s faith in the promise of God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

εἰς…τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

The word translated as toward could also mean “with regard to” or “regarding.” If it might be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “with regard to the promise of God” or “regarding the promise of God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the promise that comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the promise that came from God” or “the promise from God” (See: Possession)

τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of promise, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “the things God promised” or “the things God said would happen” (See: Abstract Nouns)

οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ

Here, did not waver and unbelief form a double negative expression. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “he did not waver in belief” or “his belief did not waver” (See: Double Negatives)

τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ…τῇ πίστει

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of the unbelief and the faith, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “by distrusting … by trusting” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God strengthened him in the faith” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει

Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham’s faith as if it were something that a person could be strengthened in. He means that God enabled Abraham to continue trusting him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was enabled to keep on trusting” (See: Metaphor)

δοὺς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “having glorified God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 4:21

πληροφορηθεὶς

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God fully convinced him” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐπήγγελται…ἐστιν

The pronoun he refers to God, not Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God had promised, God is” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὃ ἐπήγγελται

Here, what he had promised refers to the promise Paul describes in verse 13. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things God promised to Abraham” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Romans 4:22

διὸ καὶ

Here, therefore introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “And for this reason” or “And this is the reason why” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην

This clause is a quotation from Genesis 15:6. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: Quote Markings)

ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην

See how you translated this in verse 3. (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 4:23

οὐκ ἐγράφη…δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον, ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases and combine them. Alternate translation: “Now the phrase ‘it was counted to him,’ was not written only for his sake” (See: Information Structure)

αὐτὸν…αὐτῷ

The pronouns his and him refer to Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham’s … to him” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

οὐκ ἐγράφη…δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Moses wrote the quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses did not write it only for Abraham’s sake” (See: Active or Passive)

δι’ αὐτὸν

Alternate translation: “for him” or “regarding him”

ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ,

This clause is a quotation from Genesis 15:6. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: Quote Markings)

ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ

See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 4:24

δι’ ἡμᾶς, οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν

Here, our and whom refer to all those who believe in Jesus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “for the sake us believers who are about to be counted, to we who believe in the one who raised from the dead ones Jesus, the Lord of us all” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

δι’ ἡμᾶς

See how you translated “for his sake” in the previous verse.

οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “to whom God is about to count it” (See: Active or Passive)

μέλλει

Here the pronoun it refers to the “faith” mentioned in verses 5 and 20. Previously it referred to Abraham’s faith, but in this verse it refers to our faith. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “our faith is about” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

λογίζεσθαι

See how you translated counted in the previous verse.

τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν

This clause refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who raised Jesus our Lord from the dead ones” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν

Here, raised is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused Jesus our Lord to live again” (See: Idiom)

ἐκ νεκρῶν

Here, the phrase translated the dead ones refers to dead people. Here it means that Jesus physically died and was buried. If your language has a word or phrase for the place that dead people go, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “from the place where dead people are” (See: Idiom)

Romans 4:25

ὃς…ἡμῶν…τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν

Here the pronoun who refers to Jesus, and our refers to all “those who believe” in him, as mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus … we believers’ … the justification of us believers” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὃς παρεδόθη…ἠγέρθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up … God raised” (See: Active or Passive)

ὃς παρεδόθη

Paul speaks figuratively of Jesus as if he were a thing that could be given up to another person. Paul means that God allowed people to arrest and kill Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who was allowed to be killed” (See: Metaphor)

διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν…διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of trespasses and justification, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because we trespassed … to make us righteous” (See: Abstract Nouns)

διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν

Here Paul uses for the sake of differently than he did in verses 23–24. Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate the reason why Jesus was given up. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of our trespasses” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἠγέρθη

See how you translated raised in the previous verse. (See: Idiom)

διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν

Here Paul uses for the sake of differently than he did in the first part of this verse. Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate one of the purposes for Jesus being raised. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of our justification” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

Romans 5

Romans 5 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21)
   • God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26)
   • No one can boast in works (3:27–31)
   • The examples of Abraham and David (4:1–25)
   • The blessings of justification (5:1–11)
   • Adam and Christ are compared (5:12–5:21)

Many scholars view verses 12-17 as some of the most important, but difficult, verses in Scripture to understand. Some of their richness and meaning has likely been lost while being translated from how the original Greek was constructed.

Special concepts in this chapter

Results of justification

How Paul explains the results of our being justified is an important part of this chapter. These results include having peace with God, having access to God, being confident about our future, being able to rejoice when suffering, being eternally saved, and being reconciled with God. (See: just, justice, unjust, injustice, justify, justification)

“All sinned”

Scholars are divided over what Paul meant in verse 12: “And death spread to all people, because all sinned.” Some believe that all of mankind was present in the “seed of Adam.” So, as Adam is the father of all mankind, all of mankind was present when Adam sinned. Others believe that Adam served as a representative head for mankind. So when he sinned, all of mankind “fell” as a result. Whether people today played an active or passive role in Adam’s original sin is one way these views differ. Other passages will help one decide. (See: seed, semen and sin, sinful, sinner, sinning and Active or Passive)

The second Adam

Adam was the first man and the first “son” of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” in this chapter and the true son of God. He brings life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: Son of God, the Son and die, dead, deadly, death)

Romans 5:1

δικαιωθέντες οὖν ἐκ πίστεως, εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Let us have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, because we have been made right with God by trusting in him” or “We can have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, since God makes us right with himself by trusting in him” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

δικαιωθέντες οὖν

Here, Therefore indicates that what follows in 5:1-5 is a new section that describes the results of being made right with God. Alternate translation (remove comma): “As a result of having been made right” or “So then, if we have been made right” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

δικαιωθέντες…ἐκ πίστεως

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “because God makes us righteous when we trust him” or “since God justifies us through trusting in him” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐκ πίστεως

See how you translated this phrase in 4:16. (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

This phrase gives us information about how the believer can have peace with God. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus Christ allows us to have peace with God” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “we can live safely” or “let us live peacefully” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they could possess or own peace. He means that they can or must live peacefully with God. If your readers would not understand what have peace means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “let us try to live peacefully” or “we must live peacefully” (See: Metaphor)

ἔχωμεν

The phrase let us have peace communicates an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an appeal. Alternate translation: “we must have” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

ἔχωμεν…ἡμῶν

The pronouns us and our inclusively refer to all those who believe in Jesus (See 4:24–25). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “let us believers … our” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In 5:1–5, Paul highlights the interactive work of the Trinity in the salvation of believers in Christ. Here, the Old Testament title for God, Lord, is applied to Jesus, equating him with God. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. (See: Translating Son and Father)

Romans 5:2

δι’ οὗ καὶ τὴν προσαγωγὴν ἐσχήκαμεν, τῇ πίστει εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν; καὶ καυχώμεθα ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of the access or faith, grace, or hope, you could express the same ideas another way. Alternate translation: “The Lord Jesus Christ also allows us through trusting in him to access how gracious God is … boastful, hopeful to experience God’s glory” (See: Abstract Nouns)

δι’ οὗ καὶ τὴν προσαγωγὴν ἐσχήκαμεν, τῇ πίστει εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην

This phrase gives us further information about how Jesus helps the believer. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “The Lord Jesus Christ also allows us through trusting in him to access God’s grace” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

οὗ

The pronoun whom refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “through Jesus” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

καὶ…ἐσχήκαμεν…ἑστήκαμεν…καυχώμεθα

Unless otherwise noted, the pronoun we and its other forms (“us” or “our”) refer inclusively to all believers in Christ in chapter 5. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we believers also have … we believers stand … we believers boast” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν

Paul speaks figuratively of grace as if it were a location that someone could access and where someone could stand. He means that by trusting in Jesus it allows believers to confidently experience how gracious God is toward his people. If your readers would not understand what grace in which we stand means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “to confidently experience how kind God is” or “to safely experience how gracious God is” (See: Metaphor)

καυχώμεθα ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul uses a repetitive series of phrases in 5:2–4 to show how powerful hope is. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of the ways Christians can boast in the hope of the glory of God. Paul goes on to say in 5:5 that “hope does not disappoint.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that express reasons to hope. (See: Litany)

καυχώμεθα ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι

Here, hope is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person about whom someone could boast. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “we assuredly boast” or “let us hopefully rejoice” (See: Personification)

τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using possessive forms to describe how glory relates God. Use a natural way in your language to express these ideas. Here, of the glory of God could refer to: (1) the glorious life humans were meant to live (See 3:23). Alternate translation: “of sharing again in the glory God gave us” or “experiencing the glory that comes from God” (2) glorifying God (See also 5:11 for glory and boast). Alternate translation: “of glorifying God” or “of God’s glory” (See: Possession)

Romans 5:3

οὐ μόνον δέ, ἀλλὰ καὶ καυχώμεθα

What follows the words And not only this, but also here is in contrast to what would be an expected response to sufferings. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Not only can we boast in the hope of the glory of God, but we can even boast” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

καὶ καυχώμεθα ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν, εἰδότες ὅτι ἡ θλῖψις ὑπομονὴν κατεργάζεται

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because we also know that suffering brings about endurance, we boast in our sufferings” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

καὶ καυχώμεθα ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν

Here, sufferings are spoken of figuratively as though they were a person about whom someone could boast (See 5:2). If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “we can also boast when we suffer” or “let us rejoice even if we are distressed” (See: Personification)

ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν…ἡ θλῖψις…ὑπομονὴν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sufferings and suffering and endurance, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “when we suffer … when we suffer … a way to endure” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἡ θλῖψις ὑπομονὴν κατεργάζεται

Paul speaks figuratively of endurance as if it were an object that could be produced. He means that when a Christian trusts in God while suffering, he develops within them the character quality of endurance. If your readers would not understand what brings about endurance means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “when we suffer God uses it to teach us how to endure” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 5:4

ἡ δὲ ὑπομονὴ δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ ἐλπίδα

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and endurance produces character, and character produces hope” (See: Ellipsis)

ἡ…ὑπομονὴ…ἐλπίδα

See how you translated endurance in 5:3 and hope in 5:2. (See: Abstract Nouns)

δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of character, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “makes us approved by God, and when God approves us it” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 5:5

ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς οὐ καταισχύνει, ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “And because the love of God has been poured into our hearts through the Holy Spirit, who has been given to us–hope does not disappoint” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς

The implication is that hope here refers to the hope of the glory of God in 5:2. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And being confident in God’s glory” or “And the hope of the glory of God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δὲ

Here, And indicates that what follows summarizes Paul’s litany about hope. Alternate translation: “So” or “As a result” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἡ…ἐλπὶς οὐ καταισχύνει

Here, hope is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could disappoint. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “being confident that we will once again live in the glorious way God intended, we are not disappointed” (See: Personification)

ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν

Paul speaks figuratively of love as if it were a something that could be poured out of a pitcher, and our hearts as though they were containers that could be filled. He means that the Holy Spirit has completely revealed to God’s people how much God loves them. If your readers would not understand what it means to be shipwrecked in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “because the Holy Spirit, who God has given us, has deeply revealed how much God loves his people” (See: Metaphor)

ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul says that “the Holy Spirit” did it. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, who God gave us, poured out God’s love deep within us” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν

In 5:1–5, Paul highlights the interactive work of the Trinity in the salvation of believers in Christ. Here it the Holy Spirit who pours out the love of God in the believer’s heart (See Acts 2:17, 18, 33; 10:45; Titus 3:6 where both the Father and Jesus are agents in the giving or pouring out of the Holy Spirit). Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how love relates to God. Use a natural way to express this relationship. Here, the love of God could refer to: (1) God’s love for us. Alternate translation: “God’s love” or “God’s love for us” (2) our love for God. Alternate translation: “love for God” (See: Possession)

ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν

Here, hearts is a metonym for a person’s inner being. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in their inner beings” or “out deep within them” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 5:6

ἔτι γὰρ Χριστὸς, ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν ἔτι, κατὰ καιρὸν ὑπὲρ ἀσεβῶν ἀπέθανεν

These two phrases being weak and the ungodly mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show why Christ needed to die. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Indeed, while we were still weak and ungodly, at just the right time Christ died for us” (See: Parallelism)

γὰρ

Here, For indicates that what follows in 5:6–8 explains “the love of God” in 5:5. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἔτι…ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “while we still were being weak” (See: Ellipsis)

κατὰ καιρὸν

Here, the term at the right time is an Old Testament idiom meaning “in its proper season.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “at the appointed time” or “at God’s chosen time” (See: Idiom)

ὑπὲρ ἀσεβῶν ἀπέθανεν

Here, Christ died for the ungodly gives us further information about what “the love of God” means in 5:5. Paul means that God shows how much he loves his people by sending Christ to sacrificially die for their sake (See “blood” in 5:9). If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “died for the sake of godless ones” or “died on behalf of ungodly people” or “died in the place of those who are ungodly” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

ἀσεβῶν

Paul is using the adjective ungodly as a noun in order to describe a group of people, in this case, we. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “ungodly people” or “those who are godless” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 5:7

μόλις γὰρ ὑπὲρ δικαίου τις ἀποθανεῖται; ὑπὲρ γὰρ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ, τάχα τις καὶ τολμᾷ ἀποθανεῖν

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how undeserving it is that Christ would die for “the ungodly” (See 5:6). If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “It would certainly be rare for anyone to die on behalf of a righteous or good person” (See: Parallelism)

Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to express how amazing it is that Christ would die for “the ungodly” (See 5:6). If this would be confusing in your language, you can place this verse in parentheses or use some other way that is natural in your language for indicating an aside. (See: Aside)

μόλις γὰρ…τις ἀποθανεῖται…γὰρ…τάχα

Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize how rare it is for someone dying on behalf of another. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Let us consider how rare it would be for someone to die … let us suppose that just maybe” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

τις…τις

The pronoun someone refers to a hypothetical person that might die for someone else. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person … a person” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

καὶ τολμᾷ ἀποθανεῖν

Paul speaks figuratively of dying as if it were a dare or challenge to overcome. He means that someone would be brave enough to give their life for the sake of someone else. If your readers would not understand what dare to die means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “might even be willing to die” or “would even be brave enough to die” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 5:8

δὲ

What follows the word But here is in contrast to what was expected, that Christ would die for godly people. Instead, Christ died for sinners. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” or “Instead,” or “On the contrary,” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ἑαυτοῦ

Paul uses the word his own to emphasize how much God loves his people. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “his very own” or “his personal” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀγάπην εἰς ἡμᾶς

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of love, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how much God loves us” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὅτι ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν, Χριστὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἀπέθανεν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “by the fact that Christ died for us, even while we were still sinners” (See: Information Structure)

ὅτι ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν

This phrase gives us further information about how much love God has for his people. Paul is pointing out how undeserving God’s people are of his own love. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “in this way: even while we were still sinners” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete (See also 5:6). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “while we still were being sinners” (See: Ellipsis)

ἁμαρτωλῶν

Paul is using the adjective sinners as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who lived sinfully” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 5:9

πολλῷ οὖν μᾶλλον δικαιωθέντες νῦν ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ, σωθησόμεθα δι’ αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τῆς ὀργῆς

Here, then introduces a result clause. If it would be more natural in your language, you could rearrange the order of these phrases to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “As a result, how much more now will we be saved from the wrath, since we have been made righteous by his blood” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

πολλῷ οὖν μᾶλλον

Here, Much more then strongly emphasizes that what follows is another important result of having been made right with God. Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “It is much more certain” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

δικαιωθέντες…σωθησόμεθα

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. If you must state who did the actions, Paul implies that “God” did them. Alternate translation: “God has made us right with himself … God will save us” or “God has justified … God will save us” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ

Paul is figuratively describing Christ’s death by association with his blood, which is related to his sacrificial death (See the same phrase in 3:25). If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “on the basis of his sacrificial death” or “by his death” or “in his sacrifice” (See: Metonymy)

δι’ αὐτοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how people are saved. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, through him could refer to: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation: “through Jesus” or (2) Jesus’ blood. Alternate translation: “through it” (3) both Jesus and his blood. Alternate translation: “through his blood” or “through Jesus’ blood” (See: Possession)

ἀπὸ τῆς ὀργῆς

Here, wrath is spoken of figuratively as though it were person from whom someone needs to be saved or rescued. Paul means that believers in Christ are saved from experiencing God’s wrath or being punished by God. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “from experiencing God’s wrath” or “from being punished by God” (See: Personification)

τῆς ὀργῆς

Here, the indicates a specialized meaning of wrath. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract phrase the wrath in another way. Here, the wrath refers to “the day of wrath” (See note at 2:5 for the day of wrath). Alternate translation: “the Final Judgment” or “the Final Punishment” or “from when God finally judges sinners” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 5:10

γὰρ

Here what follows For in 5:10–11 further explains and summarizes this section about having “peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ” (See 5:1). Alternate translation: “In summary” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

εἰ γὰρ ἐχθροὶ ὄντες

Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Pau; is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Actually, since when we were enemies” (See: Connect — Factual Conditions)

ἐχθροὶ ὄντες

Paul is using the adjective enemies as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “while being people who were God’s enemies” or “while we were hostile” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

κατηλλάγημεν τῷ Θεῷ…καταλλαγέντες, σωθησόμεθα

If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. If you must state who did these actions, Paul implies that “God” did them. Alternate translation: “God reconciled us to himself … since God reconciled us, he will save us” (See: Active or Passive)

τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ

Here, Son is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. Be sure to accurately translate this title in your translation. Alternate translation: “of God’s Son” or “Jesus his Son” (See: Translating Son and Father)

πολλῷ μᾶλλον

Here, much more strongly emphasizes that what follows is an important result of having been reconciled with God (See this phrase in 5:9). Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “it is much more certain” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

διὰ τοῦ θανάτου τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ…ἐν τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ

Here, death and life are spoken of figuratively as though they were people who could reconcile and save someone. Paul means that God shows how much he loves his people by sending his Son to sacrificially die for their sake, and that God will save them from eternal death and punishment (See note for “the wrath” in 5:9) because Jesus conquered death by resurrecting after he died. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “because Jesus sacrificially died for our sake … will God save us from eternal death because Jesus conquered death by resurrecting after he died” (See: Personification)

Romans 5:11

οὐ μόνον δέ, ἀλλὰ καὶ

What follows the words And not only this, but also emphasizes that it is not only what God has done for his people in Christ that is important (See the same phrase in 5:3), but that we also boast in God. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Not only will we be saved by his life, but we should also continue to boast” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

καυχώμενοι ἐν τῷ Θεῷ

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were boasting inside of God. Paul means that these believers in Christ boast about how great God is. If your readers would not understand what boast in God means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “we also boast about how great God is” or “boast because of God” (See: Metaphor)

ἐν τῷ Θεῷ, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Here Paul highlights the interactive work of the Trinity in the salvation of believers in Christ. Here, the Old Testament title for God, Lord, is applied to Jesus, equating him with God. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. (See: Translating Son and Father)

δι’ οὗ νῦν τὴν καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν

This clause summarizes how Jesus saves the believer (See 5:1–2 for similar wording). If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer by starting a new sentence or some other way. Alternate translation (replace previous comma with a period): “It is through the death of Lord Jesus Christ on our behalf that we become reconciled with God” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

νῦν τὴν καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of reconciliation, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “we have now become reconciled with God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 5:12

This verse communicates similar ideas. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show the widespread effects of sin and death. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “For this reason, one man caused sin and then death to enter the world; and death and then sin spread throughout the human race” (See: Parallelism)

διὰ τοῦτο

Here, Therefore indicates that what follows in 5:12–21 is Paul’s explanation of the relationship between human sin and God’s grace. Alternate translation: “For this reason” or “Because of this” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ὥσπερ δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου ἡ ἁμαρτία εἰς τὸν κόσμον εἰσῆλθεν, καὶ διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους ὁ θάνατος διῆλθεν

Here, sin and death are spoken of figuratively as though they were persons who could travel to different places. Paul means that the way God intended for the world and human beings to function became thoroughly corrupted by sin and death. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “because one man sinned, he would die. All human beings born after that one man would die too because of the effects of his sinning” (See: Personification)

δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου

The implication is that the one man is Adam, the first human being. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly, since “Adam” is not mentioned until 5:14. Alternate translation: “through the one man Adam” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δι’ ἑνὸς

The number one is a symbol of unity. Paul uses this possessive form through one twelve times in 5:12-19 to emphasize the unity of Jesus with humanity. Be sure to retain this important phrase throughout your translation of this section. (See: Symbolic Language)

ἡ ἁμαρτία…τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος…ὁ θάνατος

Here, the indicates a specialized meaning of sin and death. If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract phrases the sin and the death in another way. Here, the sin and the death mean “death ruled” and “sin ruled” (See 5:14,21). Alternate translation: “the power of sin … the power of sin, the power of death … the power of death” or “the dominion of sin … the dominion of sin, the dominion of death … the dominion of death” (See: Abstract Nouns)

διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the death entered the world through the sin” (See: Ellipsis)

καὶ οὕτως

Here, so introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “and as a result,” or “so then also” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἀνθρώπους

Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” or “humanity” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

ἐφ’ ᾧ

The phrase translated concerning which is a singular. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly (See also the introductory notes at the beginning of this chapter). The pronoun which could refer to: (1) death. Alternate translation: “because of this death” or “concerning this death” (2) the effect of sin and death. Alternate translation: “because of the dominion of sin and death” or “concerning the dominion of sin and death” (3) the one man. Alternate translation: “because of the one man” or “concerning the one man” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

πάντες

Paul is using the adjective all as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all men” or “all humanity” or “all people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 5:13

In 5:13–17, Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to explain the relationship between law and sin and death. If this would be confusing in your language, you could use parentheses or some other way in your language to indicate an aside. (See: Aside)

ἄχρι γὰρ νόμου…μὴ ὄντος νόμου

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “For until the law came … when there was no law” (See: Ellipsis)

γὰρ

Here, For introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why death caused sin until “the law came in so that the trespass might increase” (See 5:20). Alternate translation: “This is because” or “This is the reason why” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἄχρι…νόμου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the time period until relates to law. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, until could refer to: (1) the time until law was given. Alternate translation: “For up to the time God gave his law to the Jews … since God’s law did not exist” (2) the whole time the law was in effect until Christ came. Alternate translation: “until the end of the law … when the law was no longer in effect” (See: Possession)

ἁμαρτία…ἁμαρτία

See how you translated sin in 5:12. (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἁμαρτία ἦν ἐν κόσμῳ, ἁμαρτία δὲ

Here, sin is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person located in the world and who could be charged with sinning. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there were still people in the world who sinned, but their sinful way of life” (See: Personification)

δὲ

What follows the word but here is in contrast to what was expected, that God would count sin against people. Instead, sin has no legal consequences until the law is given. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “instead” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ἁμαρτία…οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God did not reckon it as sinning” or “God did not impute it as sin” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 5:14

ἀλλὰ

What follows the word Nevertheless here is in contrast to what was expected, that since there was no law, there would be no consequences for doing what is wrong. Instead, Paul restates that death is the problem for humanity, not breaking the law God gave to his people. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Although this is true” or “Instead” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ἐβασίλευσεν ὁ θάνατος

Here, death is spoken of figuratively as though it were a king. Paul means that every person was under the control of death. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “all humans came under the control of death” or “no human could escape dying” or “human life inevitably ended in death” (See: Personification)

ὁ θάνατος

See how you translated death in 5:12. (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως

Paul speaks figuratively, using these two people to represent the period of time between Adam and Moses. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the time when Adam sinned until the time when God gave Moses his law” (See: Merism)

καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ

This phrase gives us further information about over whom death ruled. It is not making a distinction between those who lived during the time of Adam and Moses. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “even over the people who did not disobey in the same way as Adam did” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος

If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of likeness, transgression, and pattern, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the same way as Adam transgressed, who typifies the coming one” or “exactly how Adam transgressed, who patterns he who will come” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the likeness relates to the transgression. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “Adam’s” instead of the noun “Adam,” or you could use a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “like Adam’s transgression” or “in the same way Adam transgressed” (See: Possession)

Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος

Paul speaks figuratively of Adam as if he were a model or shape or drawing. Paul means that Adam represents humanity. If your readers would not understand what it means to be a pattern in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Adam, who is a replica of he who is coming” or “Adam, who models the coming one” (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ μέλλοντος

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how pattern relates to the one who is coming. Paul means that Adam represents the ideal human being, Jesus, who will come in the future (See 5:15). If this is not clear in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “representing Jesus who would come in the future” or “prefiguring Jesus who was destined to come” (See: Possession)

Romans 5:15

ἀλλ’

Here, what follows But contrasts the trespass with the gift. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

τὸ παράπτωμα…τὸ χάρισμα…τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι…ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of trespass, gracious gift, grace, and gift you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “since Adam rebelled … what God graciously gave … when the one man trespassed … how gracious God is and what he graciously gave” (See: Abstract Nouns)

γὰρ

Here, For indicates that what follows explains the difference between the trespass and the gracious gift. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

εἰ

Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of the gracious gift are superior to the consequences of the trespass. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the trespass that comes from one man. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “one man’s” instead of the adjective “one” or a verb form. Alternate translation: “by one man’s trespass” or “because one man trespassed” (See: Possession)

τοῦ ἑνὸς

Paul is using the adjective one as a noun in order to refer to Adam (See 5:14). Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could make these references explicit. Alternate translation: “Adam, the one man” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

οἱ πολλοὶ…τοὺς πολλοὺς

Here Paul is using the adjective many as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many people … many people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

πολλῷ μᾶλλον

Here, much more strongly emphasizes the difference between the results of the trespass of Adam and the grace of God that comes through Jesus Christ (See how you translated this phrase in 5:10). Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “even more certainly” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe grace that comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “God’s” instead of the noun “God,” or another way. Alternate translation: “God’s grace” or “the grace from God” or “how kind God is” (See: Possession)

τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the grace relates to the one man Jesus Christ. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “from the one man” or “associated with the one man” (See: Possession)

τοῦ Θεοῦ…Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Here Paul highlights the interactive work of the Trinity in the salvation of believers by the grace of God and Jesus Christ. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. (See: Translating Son and Father)

τῇ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how grace relates to the one man, Jesus Christ. Use a natural way to express this idea. Here, grace could refer to: (1) grace through Jesus. Alternate translation: “that comes through the one man, Jesus Christ” (2) grace from Jesus. Alternate translation: “that comes from the one man, Jesus Christ” (See: Possession)

ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι, τῇ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, εἰς τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐπερίσσευσεν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “abounded unto the many the grace of God and the gift by the grace of the one man, Jesus Christ” (See: Information Structure)

Romans 5:16

καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος, τὸ δώρημα; τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς, εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων, εἰς δικαίωμα

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Indeed, because the judgment came from one man unto condemnation, but the gift came from many trespasses unto justification. This is why the gift is not the same as through the one man who sinned” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

καὶ

What follows the word And here contrasts the way the gift and the judgment happened. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But” or “Yet” or “However” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

Romans 5:17

γὰρ

Here, For indicates that what follows explains the difference between the trespass and the gift (See 5:15 for similar ideas). Alternate translation: “For this reason” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

εἰ

Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of the gift are superior to the consequences of the trespass. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι

See how you translated this phrase in 5:15. (See: Possession)

τοῦ ἑνὸς…τοῦ ἑνός…τοῦ ἑνὸς

See how you translated these nominal adjectives in 5:16. (See: Nominal Adjectives)

τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι, ὁ θάνατος…τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης…ἐν ζωῇ

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because one man trespassed, the fact that people die … how excessively kind God is and how he gives people a right relationship with him … by living eternally” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὁ θάνατος ἐβασίλευσεν

See how you translated this phrase in 5:14. (See: Personification)

πολλῷ μᾶλλον

See how you translated this phrase in 5:15. (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν, διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ.

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “because of the one man Jesus Christ will … reign in life” (See: Information Structure)

οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες, ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were kings in a location called life. He means that they will rule with Jesus Christ and live eternally. If your readers would not understand what rule in life means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “will those receive the abundance of grace and the gift of righteousness rule and live eternally” or “will those receive the abundance of grace and the gift of righteousness live as kings forever” (See: Metaphor)

οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες

This clause gives describes the people who will rule in life. It is not making a distinction between those who receive and those who rule. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “those who receive the abundance of grace and the gift of righteousness also” (See: Distinguishing Versus Informing or Reminding)

οἱ…τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how righteousness is a gift. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “those who receive the gift of being made righteous” (See: Possession)

οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος…λαμβάνοντες

Paul is using the possessive form to describe abundance that comes from grace. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “abundant” instead of the noun “abundance” or a verbal form. Alternate translation: “those who receive God’s abundant grace” or “those who experience how abundantly gracious God is” (See: Possession)

Romans 5:18

ἄρα οὖν ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς παραπτώματος, εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους εἰς κατάκριμα, οὕτως καὶ δι’ ἑνὸς δικαιώματος, εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους εἰς δικαίωσιν ζωῆς

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “So then, just as one man trespassed and this caused all men to become condemned, so also one man acted righteous and this caused all men to become justified for living eternally” (See: Ellipsis)

ἄρα οὖν

Here, So then indicates that what follows in 5:18–21 summarizes the ideas of 5:12–17. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Finally” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

παραπτώματος…κατάκριμα…δικαιώματος…δικαίωσιν

See how you translated these abstracts nouns in 4:25; 5:16. (See: Abstract Nouns)

πάντας ἀνθρώπους…πάντας ἀνθρώπους

Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. See how your translated this word in 5:12. Alternate translation: “all humanity … all humanity” or “all people … all people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

δικαίωσιν ζωῆς

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how justification relates to life. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “justification that brings eternal life” or “eternal justification” or “justification which is eternal life” (See: Possession)

ζωῆς

Here the implication is that life refers to “eternal life” (See “rule in life” in 5:17 and 2:7). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” or “for living eternally” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 5:19

These two clauses mean the opposite thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in opposite ways, to show the contrast between Adam and Christ. Be sure to retain the similar forms to keep the parallel ideas explicit. (See: Parallelism)

ὥσπερ γὰρ

Here, For just as links what follows by using wording that is similar to the beginning of 5:18. Alternate translation: “Indeed, in the same way, as” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

διὰ τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου…διὰ τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of disobedience and obedience, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because the one man Adam disobeyed … because the one man Jesus obeyed” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου…τοῦ ἑνὸς

The implication is that one man refers to “Adam” and the one refers to “Jesus Christ” (See 5:14–15). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the one man Adam … the one man Jesus Christ” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἁμαρτωλοὶ κατεστάθησαν οἱ πολλοί…δίκαιοι κατασταθήσονται οἱ πολλοί

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” appointed this to happen. Alternate translation: “God appointed the many people as sinful … God will appoint the many people as righteous” (See: Active or Passive)

ἁμαρτωλοὶ…οἱ πολλοί…δίκαιοι…οἱ πολλοί

Paul is using the adjectives many, sinners, and righteous as nouns in order to describe groups of people (See how you translated many in 5:15). Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many…sinful people…many…righteous people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Romans 5:20

δὲ

Here, Now indicates that what follows in 5:20–21 links how sin and grace relate. Alternate translation: “Not only that, but when” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

νόμος…τὸ παράπτωμα…ἡ ἁμαρτία…ἡ χάρις

See how you translated the abstract nouns: law in 5:12–13, trespass in 5:15–18, sin in 5:12–13, and grace in 5:15, 17. (See: Abstract Nouns)

παρεισῆλθεν

Since the Greek word that ULT translates as came in can mean to sneak in unnoticed (See Galatians 2:4; Jude 1:4). Paul may be stressing how the coming of the law was like an unwelcome person secretly intruding at some location. If this is confusing in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “intruded like a person sneaking in unnoticed” (See: Personification)

πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα…ἐπλεόνασεν ἡ ἁμαρτία, ὑπερεπερίσσευσεν ἡ χάρις

Paul speaks figuratively of the trespass, sin, and grace as if they were crops. He means that the power or influence of these concepts expanded throughout humanity. If your readers would not understand what * increase* or abounded mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “how people trespass God’s commands would become more evident … people living sinfully became more evident, how gracious God is became even more obvious” (See: Metaphor)

ἵνα πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα

Use a natural way in your language for expressing the ideas of result or purpose. This clause could refer to: (1) the result of God’s purpose of giving the law. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “causing how much people trespass what God commands to increase” (2) God’s purpose in giving the law. Alternate translation: “in order to expose how much people trespass what God commands” (3) both God’s purpose and the result of his giving the law. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “to cause an increase in how much people trespass”

δὲ

What follows the word But here is in contrast to what was expected, that the God’s grace actually became more evident when sin increased. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” or “Yet” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

οὗ

Paul speaks figuratively of sin and grace as if they were located somewhere. Here, where indicates the influence or power of sin and grace. If your readers would not understand what where means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “whatever ways” or “however” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 5:21

ἵνα

This phrase introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “so then” or “as a result” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὥσπερ ἐβασίλευσεν ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ…χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον

Here, sin is spoken of figuratively as though it were a king of a place called death. Here, righteousness is spoken of figuratively as though it were a prince ruling on behalf of a king called grace. Paul means that sin causes everyone to die, and God’s grace allows people to become righteous, so they can live eternally. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in the same way as living sinfully causes death, the same is true for how gracious God is, that by making people right with himself they can live eternally” (See: Personification)

ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ…ἡ χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον

See how you translated the abstract nouns: sin in 5:20, death and righteousness in 5:17, grace in 5:20, and everlasting life in 2:7. (See: Abstract Nouns)

οὕτως

This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God revealed his grace. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that” or “for the purpose that” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

διὰ δικαιοσύνης, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that the righteousness of Jesus Christ is how grace rules (See also 5:17). If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “leading to everlasting life through how Jesus Christ our Lord makes people righteous” or “bringing eternal life by how righteous Jesus Christ our Lord is” (See: Parallelism)

Romans 6

Romans 6 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39)
   • Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14)
   • Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23)

Paul begins this chapter by answering how someone might hypothetically object to what he taught in Chapter 5. (See: Hypothetical Situations)

Special concepts in this chapter

Against the Law

In this chapter, Paul refutes the teaching that Christians can live however they want after they are saved. Scholars call this “antinomianism” or being “against the law.” To motivate godly living, Paul recalls the great price Jesus paid for a Christian to be saved. (See: save, saved, safe, salvation and godly, godliness, ungodly, godless, ungodliness, godlessness)

Servants of sin

Before believing in Jesus, sin enslaves people. God frees Christians from serving sin. They are able to choose to serve Christ in their lives. Paul explains that when Christians choose to sin, they willingly choose to sin. (See: faith and sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

Fruit

This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. (See: fruit, fruitful, unfruitful and righteous, righteousness, unrighteous, unrighteousness, upright, uprightness)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: Rhetorical Question and guilt, guilty and sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Death

Paul uses “death” many different ways in this chapter: physical death, spiritual death, sin reigning in the heart of man, and to end something. He contrasts sin and death with the new life provided by Christ and the new way Christians are supposed to live after they are saved. (See: die, dead, deadly, death)

Romans 6:1

τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ?

Paul is using rhetorical questions in 6:1–3 to reject certain rumors that misrepresent his teachings (See 3:8). If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We certainly are not saying that people should keep sinning so that God will be more gracious!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί οὖν

Here, What then marks a change in topic in 6:1–11, where Paul teaches about the connection between Christian baptism and union with Christ’s death and resurrection. (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν

When Paul says we the first time, he is speaking of himself and the other apostles, so we would be exclusive (See the similar language in 3:8). However, when Paul says we the second time, he seems to be including all “who were baptized into Christ Jesus” (See 6:3), so the second use of we would be inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “will we apostles say? Should we believers in Christ” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ

Paul speaks figuratively of sin as if it were a location. He means that Christians should no longer continue to live sinfully. He also speaks figuratively of grace as though it were a crop (See 5:20). He speaks of the power or influence of grace expanding in the lives of Christians. If your readers would not understand what in sin or increase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Should we continue to live sinfully so that we can experience more of how gracious God is” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ?

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an exclamatory direct quotation. Alternate translation (change preceding question mark to a comma): “‘Should we continue in sin so that grace may increase?!’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ…ἡ χάρις

See how you translated the abstract nouns: sin and grace in 5:21. (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐπιμένωμεν

Paul could be using the question form, Should we, as an exclamation that communicates an appeal. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for making an appeal. Alternate translation (change preceding question mark to a comma): “We must” or “Let us” (See: Statements — Other Uses)

ἵνα

This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which someone would sin. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

Romans 6:2

μὴ γένοιτο

May it never be is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong prohibition (See how you translated this phrase in 3:31). (See: Exclamations)

οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, πῶς ἔτι ζήσομεν ἐν αὐτῇ?

Paul speaks figuratively of sin as if were a location where Christians could live or die. He means that for baptized Christians the spiritual kingdom of sin and death (See 5:14,17,21) lost its power over them when Christ was crucified (See 6:6). If your readers would not understand what to die to sin or live in it means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “We who are no longer dominated by sinning, how could we still live as though we are dominated by sinning” or “Since we are not dominated by sinning anymore, we certainly cannot still live sinfully!” (See: Metaphor)

οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν

Unless otherwise noted, we and “our” are inclusive of all Christians in this chapter. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “We believers who in Christ died” or “We Christians who died” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Romans 6:3

ὅτι

Here, of the fact that indicates that what follows is the rhetorical answer to the question of are you ignorant. Alternate translation: “of this reality:” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ὅσοι

The pronoun as many as refers to those people who were baptized into Christ Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many people as” or “however many of you” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν

Paul speaks figuratively of Christ Jesus and his death as if they were locations where someone could be baptized. He means that people who are baptized as Christians are united to Christ Jesus and spiritually share in benefits of his death. If your readers would not understand what baptized into means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “become baptized as a Christians are united to Christ Jesus and also as many as become baptized are united to his death” (See: Metaphor)

ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show what happens when a Christian is baptized. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “become baptized as Christians are spiritually united to Christ Jesus and spiritually participate in his death” (See: Parallelism)

τὸν θάνατον

See how you translated death in 5:21. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 6:4

συνετάφημεν οὖν αὐτῷ διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος εἰς τὸν θάνατον

This sentence means the same thing as 6:3. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show what happens in Christian baptism. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. (See: Parallelism)

συνετάφημεν οὖν αὐτῷ διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος εἰς τὸν θάνατον

Paul speaks figuratively of baptism as if it were a burial. He means that in the physical act of going under the water in baptism, the Christian ceases to be under the control of eternal death (See “died to sin” in 6:2). If your readers would not understand what buried and baptism into death mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “So then, being baptized represents being buried with Christ in his tomb” or “When we were baptized, we ceased to be controlled by eternal death” (See: Metaphor)

συνετάφημεν οὖν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, to emphasis what results from baptism. Alternate translation: “So then, we were buried” or “As a result, we were buried” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τὸν θάνατον…ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός…ζωῆς

See how you translated the abstract nouns: death in 6:3, glory in 5:2, and life in 5:21. (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἵνα ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν

This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God instituted baptism. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases to make this explicit. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that we could walk in newness of life, just as Christ was raised from the dead by the glory of the Father” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show the link between Christ’s resurrection and the Christian’s new way of life after baptism. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “we would newly live like Christ did when Father gloriously raised him from death” (See: Parallelism)

ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν

The point of this comparison is that the new way a Christian should live after being baptized is similar to being raised from the dead, like Christ was. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “we should live in a new way, similar to when the Father gloriously raised Christ from death” (See: Simile)

ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The Father gloriously resurrected Christ from death” (See: Active or Passive)

ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν

Here, the phrase raised from the dead is an idiom meaning “resurrected from where dead people are” (See how you translated this phrase in 4:24). If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Christ resurrected from death” or “Christ resurrected from the grave” (See: Idiom)

ἐκ νεκρῶν

Paul is using the adjective the dead as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “where dead people are” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός

Paul is using the possessive form to describe glory that comes from or characterizes the Father. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “Father’s” instead of the noun “Father” or make this explicit another way. Alternate translation: “through the glorious power of the Father” or “through the Father’s glory” (See: Possession)

τοῦ Πατρός

Father is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Christ Jesus, as his “Son” (See 1:3–4, 7). Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. Alternate translation: “God his Father” (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν

Here, the verb might walk is an Old Testament idiom meaning “would live” or “would act.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “we might live in new way” or “we would act like new people” (See: Idiom)

καὶ ἡμεῖς

Paul uses the phrase we too to emphasize the union of the baptized Christian with Christ’s resurrection. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we who are baptized too” or “even we” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς

Paul is using the possessive form to describe life that is characterized by newness. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “renewed” instead of the noun “newness.” Alternate translation: “with a renewed life” or “like those made newly alive” (See: Possession)

ἐν καινότητι

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of newness, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “renewed” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 6:5

εἰ γὰρ σύμφυτοι γεγόναμεν τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως ἐσόμεθα

Paul speaks figuratively of death and resurrection as if they were things to which baptized Christians could be physically attached. He means that in baptism Christians participate in the spiritually benefits obtained by Christ’s death and will one day resurrect as he did. If your readers would not understand what united with means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Indeed, since we participate in Christ’s death through baptism, we will definitely participate in Christ’s life through resurrection” (See: Metaphor)

εἰ γὰρ

Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He goes on to conclude that baptized Christians will certainly be united with Christ’s resurrection. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “Indeed, since” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

αὐτοῦ…τῆς

The pronoun his refers to Christ, not the “Father” (See 6:1–3). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Christ’s … with Christ’s” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

σύμφυτοι γεγόναμεν

Since the Greek word that ULT translates as united can mean “planted with,” Paul may be figuratively likening the process of burying a seed in the ground with being buried with Christ, and the result of a sprouting plant with Christ’s resurrection. If it would help your readers understand, you could make this explicit in your translation. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “we have become planted with” or “have grown together with him” (See: Metaphor)

τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ…τῆς ἀναστάσεως

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of likeness and resurrection, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in what is like his death … his resurrecting from the dead” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ

The implication is that likeness of his death refers to “baptism” (See 6:4). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the likeness of his death through baptism” or “in baptism that represents dying with him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀλλὰ καὶ…ἐσόμεθα

Here, also certainly strongly emphasizes that the reality of future resurrection is established in Christian baptism. If it would be more natural in your language, you could move this phrase to the beginning of the clause to make this emphasis explicit. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that we will” or “it is absolutely certain that we will” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

τῆς ἀναστάσεως

A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, his is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with his resurrection” (See: Ellipsis)

Romans 6:6

τοῦτο γινώσκοντες

Here, knowing this indicates that what follows is accepted teaching. Alternate translation: “because we know this very thing,” or “since we are certain of this fact” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ὅτι…ἵνα

What follows that gives the reason why our old man was crucified. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something happens. Alternate translation: “the reason why … was in order that” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God crucified our old man with Christ” (See: Active or Passive)

ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη

Paul speaks figuratively of sinful humanity as if it were an old man nailed to the same cross as Christ. Paul means that when Christ was crucified he destroyed the power of sin and death that controlled humanity (See 6:12–18). If your readers would not understand what old man or crucified with him means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “on Christ’s cross, God crucified the power of sin that controlled humanity” (See: Metaphor)

συνεσταυρώθη

The pronoun him refers to Christ (See 6:4). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “was crucified with Christ” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἵνα

This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God crucified our old man. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας, τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ

Paul speaks figuratively of the body of sin as if it were a condition of slavery that could be cancelled or made void. He means that how the human race was controlled by living sinfully was spiritually cancelled by the power Christ’s crucifixion. If your readers would not understand what body of sin and nullified and enslaved to sin mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “God would completely end how living sinfully controls the human race, and he would free us from how living sinfully enslaves us” (See: Metaphor)

καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας, τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God nullified how we are dominated by sinning so that living sinfully would no longer control us” or “God canceled the power of sin over our bodies, making us no longer enslaved to living sinfully” (See: Active or Passive)

τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the body is related to sin. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, the body of sin could refer to: (1) how humans tend to sin. Alternate translation: “our human tendency to sin” or “how living sinfully controls us” (2) how sin controls the human body. Alternate translation: “how sin controls our bodies” (See: Possession)

ἁμαρτίας…ἁμαρτίᾳ

See how you translated the abstract noun sin in 6:1. (See: Abstract Nouns)

τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ

Use a natural way in your language for expressing a result or purpose clause. This following clause could refer to: (1) the result of the body of sin being nullified. Alternate translation: “causing us to no longer be enslaved to sin” (2) God’s purpose for nullifying the body of sin. Alternate translation: “in order that we would no longer be enslaved to sin” (3) both God’s purpose and the result of nullifying the body of sin. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “in order to cause us no longer be enslaved to sin”

Romans 6:7

γὰρ

What follows For summarizes the ideas in 6:6. Alternate translation: “This is because” or “Since” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ὁ…ἀποθανὼν

The implication is that the one having died is the same as “the old man” who “was crucified” in 6:6. Paul means that God considers any person who has “died to sin” (See 6:2) to be righteous. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “any person who dies to sin” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

δεδικαίωται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has declared free” or “God declares is righteous” or “God has vindicated” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας

Paul is using the possessive form to describe how sin is related to has been declared righteous. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “from being enslaved to sin” or “from sin’s control” (See: Possession)

ἁμαρτίας

See how you translated this abstract noun in 6:6. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 6:8

εἰ δὲ ἀπεθάνομεν σὺν Χριστῷ

Paul speaks figuratively of baptized Christians as if they physically died with Christ (See 6:5). He means that in baptism Christians participate in the spiritual benefits obtained by Christ’s death and will one day live together with him. If your readers would not understand what died with Christ means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Indeed, since we are united to Christ’s death when baptized” (See: Metaphor)

εἰ δὲ

In this verse, Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true (See also 6:5). Paul has already affirmed that the baptized have died with Christ in 6:3–4. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “Indeed, since” (See: Connect — Contrary to Fact Conditions)

πιστεύομεν

The implication is that since baptized Christians have died with Christ, the result is that they have confidence that will eternally live together with him. You could make that explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “we are confident” or “this persuades us” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὅτι

Here, that indicates that what follows is the result of having died with Christ. Alternate translation: “the result is” or “this means” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

καὶ συνζήσομεν αὐτῷ

The implication is that live together with him refers to “everlasting life” (See 5:21; 6:4–5). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we will also live forever with him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 6:9

εἰδότες ὅτι Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν, οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “knowing that Christ is not going to die again, because he has been raised from the dead” (See: Information Structure)

εἰδότες ὅτι

Here, knowing that indicates that what follows is accepted teaching (See 6:6 for a similar phrase). Alternate translation: “because we know this very thing,” or “since we are certain that” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God caused Christ to resurrect after he died” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν

See how you translated the phrase raised from the dead in 6:4. (See: Idiom)

οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει; θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει

These two phrases mean similar things. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that Christ can never die again. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “is now Lord over death” or “has completely mastered death’s power” (See: Parallelism)

θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει

Here, death is spoken of figuratively as though it were a lord who could rule over someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he no longer submits to being dead” or “he is not dead anymore” (See: Personification)

θάνατος

See how you translated the abstract noun death in 6:4. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 6:10

γὰρ

Here, what follows For indicates the reason why Christ “no longer dies” in 6:9.(See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὃ…ὃ

Here the phrase translated in that is a pronoun. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Here, in that could refer to: (1) the way Christ died and lives. Alternate translation: “the way that…the way that” or “how … how” (2) Christ’s death and life. Alternate translation: “the death … the life” (3) the timing of Christ’s death and life. Alternate translation: “when … now that” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ἀπέθανεν…ζῇ τῷ Θεῷ

Paul speaks figuratively of sin and God as if they were locations in which Christ died and lives (See also the similar wording in 6:2 for how this fact effects baptized Christians)). Paul means that Christ died for the sake of freeing humanity from being “enslaved to sin” (See 6:6, and now that he is resurrected, he lives for the sake of glorifying God. If your readers would not understand what died for sin and lives for God means to be shipwrecked in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “he died for the sake of dominating how sinning controls people … he lives for the sake of God” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 6:11

οὕτως

This phrase introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “For this reason” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ὑμεῖς

Throughout 6:11-23, the pronoun you and “your” are plural and refer to the church at Rome. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you at Rome” or “you believers at Rome” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

λογίζεσθε ἑαυτοὺς εἶναι

Paul uses the word yourselves to emphasize how important it is for the church at Rome to personally apply the spiritual benefits of Christ’s death and resurrection to their own lives. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “regard yourselves to be personally” or “reckon yourselves as actually” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

λογίζεσθε

This is an imperative, but it could communicate an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an appeal or a command. Alternate translation: “should consider” or “consider” or “reckon” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

εἶναι νεκροὺς μὲν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ζῶντας δὲ τῷ Θεῷ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

Paul speaks figuratively of sin and God and Christ as if they were locations where Christians could die and live (See also 6:2. 10). Paul means that for Christians the spiritual kingdom of sin and death (See 5:14, 5:17, 5:21) lost its power over them when Christ was crucified (See 6:6). This happens when they are united to Christ Jesus in baptism (See 6:3–4). If your readers would not understand what be dead to sin or alive to God or in Christ Jesus mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “no longer dominated by living sinfully, but people who are spiritually resurrected by God because you are united to Christ Jesus” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 6:12

οὖν

Here, Therefore indicates that what follows is how the church at Rome should respond to the fact that they are “dead to sin, but alive to God in Christ Jesus” (See 6:11). Alternate translation: “As a result” or “So then” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

μὴ…βασιλευέτω ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι, εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ

Here, sin is spoken of figuratively as though it were king of a place called mortal body (See 5:21), and who demands obedience. Paul means that Christians should not allow sin and lusts dominate the way they use their bodies. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you must not allow your physical body to become ruled by sinning, by submitting to lusting” (See: Personification)

μὴ…βασιλευέτω ἡ ἁμαρτία

This is an imperative, but it could communicate an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an appeal or command. Alternate translation: “you should not allow sin to be king” or “I urge you, do not to let sin reign like a king” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι

Paul could be referring figuratively to the body, one part of the human being, to mean the whole person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternative translation: “over you” or “any of you” (See: Synecdoche)

ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι,

The word body is a singular noun and could emphasize the unity of the individual members of the whole church at Rome. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “over your mortal bodies” or “throughout your whole church” (See: Collective Nouns)

εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ

This phrase indicates what happens when sin rules. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, to obey could refer to: (1) the result of letting sin rule. Alternate translation: “causing you to become obedient to lusting sinfully” (2) the way sin rules. Alternate translation: “by obeying how it tempts you to lust” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of lusts, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how it urges you to lust” (See: Abstract Nouns)

αὐτοῦ

The pronoun its refers to mortal body. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “your mortal body’s” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Romans 6:13

μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἀλλὰ παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ, ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας, καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases to emphasize the similar ideas. Alternate translation: “And do not present your members as tools of unrighteousness to sin, but present your members to God as tools of righteousness. In other words, present yourselves to God, as living from death” (See: Information Structure)

μηδὲ παριστάνετε…παραστήσατε

Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if their body parts were tools that could be offered in service or used by someone. He means that the church at Rome should no longer use their body parts for sinning, but instead to live in the way God wants. If your readers would not understand what it means to present in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “do not offer … offer” (See: Metaphor)

τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ…τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you use your body parts to live unrighteously through sinning … your body parts … to live righteously” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν…τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν

Paul could be referring figuratively to the members, the body parts of the human being, to mean the whole person (See 6:12). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Here, your members could mean: (1) the whole person. Alternative translation: “yourselves … yourselves” (2) the individual body parts. Alternate translation: “your body parts … your body parts” (See: Synecdoche)

ὅπλα ἀδικίας…ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης

Paul is using the possessive form to describe what characterizes these tools. Alternate translation: “as unrighteous tools … as righteous tools” or “as tools for living unrighteously … as tools for living righteously” (See: Possession)

ὅπλα…ὅπλα

Since the Greek word that ULT translates as tools often means “weapons,” Paul could be stressing the spiritual warfare that is involved for the Christian to “not allow sin to rule over” them (See 6:14). If this is confusing in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “as weapons … as weapons”

ὅπλα…ὅπλα

Words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, as is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as tools … as tools” (See: Ellipsis)

παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ…καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ

These two phrases basically mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in similar ways, to urge the church at Rome to commit their whole lives to God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can reorder and combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “Instead, because you are free from living sinfully through being baptized, use every body part as a tool for serving God” or “Instead, because you are no longer dominated by living sinfully in baptism, present your whole body and life to God” (See: Parallelism)

ἑαυτοὺς

Paul uses the word yourselves to emphasize how the church at Rome should commit their whole lives to God. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “your whole lives” or “yourselves completely” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας

The point of this comparison is that the church at Rome should live in such a way that demonstrates that the reality that they have been baptized, and are now dead to sin, but alive to God (See 6:11). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “because through being baptized you are free from living sinfully” or “because through baptism you are no longer dominated by living sinfully” (See: Simile)

Romans 6:14

ἁμαρτία γὰρ ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει, οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “Since you are not under law, but under grace, do not allow sin to rule over you” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἁμαρτία…ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει

See how you translated the similar phrase in 6:12. (See: Personification)

ἁμαρτία…οὐ κυριεύσει

Paul is using a future statement to give a command or strong appeal. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command or appeal. Alternate translation: “sin must not rule over” or “do not allow sin to rule over” (See: Statements — Other Uses)

γάρ

Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul urges the church at Rome not to allow sin to rule over them. Alternate translation: “The reason for this” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν

Paul speaks figuratively of law and grace as if they were a kingdoms ruled by sin (See 5:17, 21 for a similar idea). He means that believing and baptized Jewish Christians are freed from the spiritual dominion of the requirements of the law, and now they serve the gracious God (See 6:15–23). If your readers would not understand what it means to under law and under grace in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Indeed, the law no longer dominates you, but you are freed by how gracious God is” (See: Personification)

ὑπὸ χάριν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “serve the gracious God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 6:15

τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν?

Paul is using a rhetorical questions in 6:15–16 to reject certain rumors that misrepresent his teachings (See also 6:1–3). If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We certainly are not saying that we should keep sinning since the law no longer dominates us, and because we now are freed by how gracious God is!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί οὖν?

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Are we then saying” or “What are we saying then” (See: Ellipsis)

τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν?

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation that is an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Are we then saying? ‘We should sin because we are not under law, but under grace!’” or “What are we saying then? ‘Let us sin because we are not under law, but under grace!’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ὑπὸ χάριν

See how you translated this abstract noun phrase in 6:14. (See: Abstract Nouns)

μὴ γένοιτο

May it never be is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong prohibition (See how you translated this phrase in 3:31). (See: Exclamations)

Romans 6:16

οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι ᾧ παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους εἰς ὑπακοήν, δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε

Paul is using a hypothetical situation to teach the church at Rome. Alternate translation: “Suppose you present yourselves to someone to obey as slaves. Then you would become slaves to that person you obey” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

ᾧ…ᾧ

The pronoun translated what can indicate a general reference to a thing or person. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Here, what could refer to: (1) the concepts of sin and obedience. Alternate translation: “to whatever … to whatever” (2) anyone or anything. Alternate translation: “to whomever or whatever… to whomever or whatever” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς

See how you translated this similar phrase in 6:13.

εἰς ὑπακοήν

This phrase is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which these people are presenting themselves as slaves. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to obey” or “for the purpose of obeying” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

ὑπακοήν…ὑπακοῆς

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of obedience, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “to obey … to obey God” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην

Here, sin and obedience are spoken of as if they were masters that slaves would obey. Paul means that depending on how a person chooses to live, they end up obeying either sin or God, like a slave would serve a master. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “whether you serve as slaves by sinning, leading you to die, or you serve as slaves by obeying God, leading you to become righteous” (See: Personification)

ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην

Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “whether you present yourselves as slaves of sin leading to death, or you present yourselves as slaves of obedience leading to righteousness” (See: Ellipsis)

ἁμαρτίας…ὑπακοῆς

Paul is using the possessive form to describe slaves that belong to sin or obedience. If this is not clear in your language, you could use make that idea explicit. Alternate translation: “slaves that belong to sin … slaves that belong to obedience” or “sin’s slaves … obedience’s slaves” (See: Possession)

ἁμαρτίας…θάνατον…δικαιοσύνην

See how you translated the abstract noun sin in 6:15, death in 6:9, and righteousness in 6:13. (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰς θάνατον…εἰς δικαιοσύνην

These phrases indicate result. Use natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “leading to death … leading to righteousness” or “bringing death … bringing righteousness” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Romans 6:17

χάρις…τῷ Θεῷ

What follows this exclamatory phrase indicates the reason why Paul is thankful to God. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God” (See: Exclamations)

δοῦλοι τῆς ἁμαρτίας

See how you translated the similar phrase of sin in 6:16. (See: Personification)

ὑπηκούσατε δὲ ἐκ καρδίας, εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς

Here, the pattern of teaching is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could be obeyed. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “but you fully accepted the form of teaching that others passed on to you” (See: Personification)

δὲ

What follows the word but here is meant to strongly contrast the former sinful life of Christians at Rome. Instead, they now have obeyed God. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “instead” or “on the contrary” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ὑπηκούσατε…ἐκ καρδίας, εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς

The pronoun which refers to the pattern. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you became willingly obedient to which pattern of teaching you were given” or “you are now fully obedient to that pattern of teaching that others passed down to you” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ὑπηκούσατε…ἐκ καρδίας

Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s inner being or motives. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you became wholeheartedly obedient” or “you totally obeyed” or “you obeyed from deep within” (See: Metonymy)

εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς

The implication is that the pattern of teaching is the apostolic traditions (See note on “we” in 3:8 and the same verb or noun forms used in 1 Corinthians 11:2; 2 Thessalonians 2:15; 3:6; 2 Timothy 1:13). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the apostles’ teaching that others orally transmitted to you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God gave other apostles to transmit to you” or “that others passed on to you” or (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 6:18

ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ

Here, sin and righteousness are spoken of as if they were masters that slaves would obey (See 6:16). Paul means that depending on how a person chooses to live, they end up serving either sin or righteousness, like a slave would serve a master. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Ever since God freed you being enslaved to living sinfully, you became enslaved to living righteously” (See: Personification)

ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε

If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “Now that God freed you from sin, he enslaved you” or “Since God released you from serving as slaves to sin, he enslaved you” (See: Active or Passive)

ἁμαρτίας…δικαιοσύνῃ

See how you translated the abstract nouns sin and righteousness in 6:16. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 6:19

ἀνθρώπινον λέγω, διὰ τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of the weakness of your flesh, I speak as a man” or “Because you are still immature, I have to speak in simple terms” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἀνθρώπινον λέγω

Here, the phrase as a man is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being” (See a similar phrase in 3:5). If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am speaking based on how human beings perceive things” or “I am talking like a mere human being” or “I am speaking the way people do” (See: Idiom)

λέγω

Here Paul speaks in the first person again. Use the natural form in your language for referring to an previously mentioned writer. The pronoun I reiterates that Paul is the writer of this letter. Since he is an old participant, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that explicit by using his name. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am speaking” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

ἀνθρώπινον

Paul is using the adjective phrase as a man as a noun in order to describe the way he is speaking. He means that he is speaking from a human perspective or with ideas any person could understand. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “from a human perspective” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

διὰ τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν…τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν…τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν…τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν

If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “because of how immature you are … body parts … act impurely and increasingly wicked behavior … your body parts … for living rightly in order to live like God’s people should” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν

Here, the term flesh is an idiom meaning “human.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “how immature you are” or “your human weakness” or “your natural limitations” (See: Idiom)

ὥσπερ γὰρ παρεστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν, οὕτως νῦν παραστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, δοῦλα τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν

These two clauses mean the opposite thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in opposite ways, to show the contrast between being slaves to uncleanness and slaves to righteousness. Be sure to retain the similar forms to keep the parallel ideas explicit. (See: Parallelism)

ὥσπερ γὰρ παρεστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν, οὕτως νῦν παραστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, δοῦλα τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν

Here, uncleanness and * righteousness* are spoken of figuratively as though they were slave-masters of members. Paul means that the church at Rome previously used their bodies to serve sinful purposes, but should now use their bodies to serve righteous purposes. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, in the same way you used to slavishly offer yourselves to live impurely, leading you to act more and more lawless, so now offer yourselves to live righteously for God, leading you to act holy” (See: Personification)

τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν…τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν

Paul refers figuratively to members, parts of the human body, to mean the whole person (See also 6:13). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “yourselves … yourselves” or “your bodies … your bodies” (See: Synecdoche)

νῦν παραστήσατε

This is an imperative, but it could communicate an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates either an urgent appeal or a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “I beg you” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “you must now use” or “I beg you now to present” or “I urge you now to offer” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

εἰς ἁγιασμόν

This phrase indicates result. Use natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “leading you to live holy” or “causing you to become sanctified” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Romans 6:20

γὰρ

Here, For introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “This reason for this is” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

δοῦλοι ἦτε τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ

These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in opposite ways, to emphasize the relationship between sin and righteousness. Be sure to retain the similar phrasing to keep the parallel ideas explicit. (See: Parallelism)

ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ

Here, sin and righteousness are spoken of figuratively as though they were slave-masters. Paul means that when church at Rome previously used their bodies to serve sinful purposes, they were not slaves of righteousness by serving God’s purposes (See 6:19). If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you did not serve God” or “you were not enslaved to righteousness” or “you did not live righteously” (See: Personification)

ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ

Paul is not making a serious suggestion here that sinful people are not required to live righteously. Paul actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of free. If this would be misunderstood in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you were unrighteous” or “you were alienated from serving God’s righteous purposes” or “you were unable to live righteously” (See: Irony)

Romans 6:21

τίνα οὖν καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε? τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος

If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “Since the outcome of those things is death, what fruit then did you have from that of which you are now ashamed?” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τίνα οὖν καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε

Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the futility of being “slaves to sin” in 6:20. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation in order to communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So then, it is clear that the shameful way you used to live never produced anything beneficial for you!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

καρπὸν

Here, the term fruit is an idiom meaning “benefit” or “advantage.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “advantage” or “profit” or “value” (See: Idiom)

ἐφ’ οἷς…ἐκείνων

The implication is that which things and those things refer to sins. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of which sins … those sins” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of outcome, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “This is because what finally results from those things is death” or “Certainly, those things end in death” (See: Abstract Nouns)

Romans 6:22

νυνὶ δέ

Here what follows But now strongly contrasts the way the baptized Christians at Rome used to live as “slaves to sin” (See 6:20). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However presently” (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ

Here, sin and God are spoken of figuratively as though they were slave-masters. Paul means that when church at Rome previously used their bodies to serve sinful purposes, they were not serving God or “righteousness” (See 6:18 for a similar phrase). If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “ever since God freed you from being enslaved to living sinfully, and you began to serve God” (See: Personification)

ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ

If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “Now that God freed you from sin, and he enslaved you to serve as his slaves” or “Since God released you from serving as slaves to sin, and he enslaved you to serve him” (See: Active or Passive)

ἔχετε τὸν καρπὸν ὑμῶν

See how you translated this idiom in 6:21. (See: Idiom)

εἰς ἁγιασμόν, τὸ…τέλος ζωὴν αἰώνιον

See how you translated the abstract nouns sanctification in 6:19, the outcome in 6:21, and everlasting life in 5:21. (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰς ἁγιασμόν

This phrase indicates result. Use natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “that leads to sanctification” or “that causes you to become holy” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Romans 6:23

τὰ γὰρ ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος

Here, sin is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could pay wages. Paul means that the result of living sinfully is eternal death. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, when a person lives sinfully it results in eternal death” (See: Personification)

τὰ γὰρ ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος

Paul speaks figuratively of death as if it were a wages paid to those who sin. He means that the result of living sinfully is eternal death. If your readers would not understand what wages or death means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “This is because whoever lives sinfully earns eternal death as if it were wages for work” (See: Metaphor)

γὰρ

Here what follows forsummarizes chapter 6 and its theme of the results of living sinfully and living righteously. Alternate translation: “This is because” or “In summary” (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

τὰ…ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the wages that come from sin. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “sin’s” instead of the noun “sin” or communicate that another way. Alternate translation: “sin’s wages” or “the wages that come from sin” (See: Possession)

θάνατος; τὸ…χάρισμα…ζωὴ αἰώνιος

See how you translated the abstract nouns death in 6:21, gracious gift in 5:15–16, and everlasting life in 6:22. (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὸ…χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gracious gift that comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “God’s” instead of the noun “God” or communicate that another way. Alternate translation: “God’s gracious gift” or “the gracious gift from God” (See: Possession)

ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

Paul speaks figuratively of eternal life as if it were occupying space inside of Christ Jesus. Paul means that eternal life comes by being united to Christ Jesus in baptism (See 6:3–4, 11). If your readers would not understand what in Christ Jesus means in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “for those who are united to Christ Jesus” or “comes through being united to Christ Jesus” (See: Metaphor)

ἡμῶν

Here, our refers to all baptized Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Romans 7

Romans 7 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39)
   • Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14)
   • Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23)
   • Christians have been freed from the law (7:1–6)
   • Christians still struggle with indwelling sin (7:7–25)

“Or do you not know”

Paul uses this phrase to discuss a new topic, while connecting what follows with the previous teaching.

Special concepts in this chapter

“We have been released from the law”

Paul explains that the law of Moses is no longer in effect. While this is true, the timeless principles behind the law reflect the character of God. (See: law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Marriage

Scripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: Metaphor)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: flesh and sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

Romans 7:1

ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ἀδελφοί (γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ), ὅτι ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ?

Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that the Jew is required to obey the law his whole life. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Because you are Jewish, you certainly understand that what God requires in his law obligates you to obey it for as long as you live!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἀδελφοί…τοῦ ἀνθρώπου…ζῇ

Although the term brothers and the man and he are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “my fellow Jewish believers in Christ … a person … that person lives” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

(γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ)

Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to clarify that he is specifically directing this part of the letter to the Jewish believers of the church at Rome. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “(this is because I am writing to Jewish believers in Christ)” (See: Aside)

γὰρ

Here what follows For indicates the reason why these brothers should understand what Paul is saying (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

λαλῶ

The pronoun I refers to Paul (See 6:19). If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am speaking” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

γινώσκουσιν…νόμον

Here, the law is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who someone else could know. Paul means that these Jewish believers in Christ understand what God’s law teaches. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to people who know what the law teaches” (See: Personification)

ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου

Here, the law is spoken of figuratively as though it were king. Paul means that, like a king, the law requires obedience for those who are obligated to obey it. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “like a king, God’s law must be obeyed by every Jewish person” (See: Personification)

Romans 7:2

ἡ γὰρ ὕπανδρος γυνὴ…δέδεται νόμῳ…κατήργηται

If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to what his law teaches, God binds the married woman … God releases her” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡ γὰρ ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ

Here, law is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could tie someone up. Paul means that the law teaches that a married woman is required to stay married to her husband for as long he is alive. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, according to what his law teaches, God requires a married woman to remain married to her husband as long as he lives” (See: Personification)

γὰρ

Here, For indicates that what follows in 7:2–3 is an example from God’s law (See that illustrates Paul’s assertion in 7:1 about how “the law rules over the man for as long as he lives”). Alternate translation: “For example,” or “As an illustration,” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

Romans 7:3

This verse ends a description of what Paul means by “the law controls a person for as long as he lives” (Romans 7:1).

μοιχαλὶς χρηματίσει

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will consider her an adulteress” or “people will call her an adulteress” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐλευθέρα ἐστὶν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου

Here being free from the law means not having to obey the law. In this case, the woman does not have to obey the law that says that a married woman cannot marry another man. Alternate translation: “she does not have to obey that law”

Romans 7:4

ὥστε, ἀδελφοί μου

This relates back to Romans 7:1.

ἀδελφοί

Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.

καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε τῷ νόμῳ διὰ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “you also died to the law when through Christ you died on the cross” (See: Active or Passive)

τῷ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγερθέντι

Here, raised from the dead is an idiom for “caused to live again.” Alternate translation: “to him who was caused to live again” (See: Idiom)

τῷ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγερθέντι

You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “to him whom God raised from the dead” or “to him whom God caused to live again” (See: Active or Passive)

καρποφορήσωμεν τῷ Θεῷ

Here, fruit is a metaphor for actions that please God. Alternate translation: “we might be able to do things pleasing to God” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 7:5

εἰς τὸ καρποφορῆσαι τῷ θανάτῳ

Here, fruit is a metaphor for a “result of one’s actions” or “outcome of one’s actions.” Alternate translation: “which resulted in spiritual-death” or “the outcome of which was our own spiritual death” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 7:6

Paul reminds us that God does not make us holy by the law.

κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God has released us from the law” (See: Active or Passive)

κατηργήθημεν

The pronoun we refers to Paul and the believers. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα

This refers to the law. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “to the law which held us” (See: Active or Passive)

γράμματος

Here, the letter refers to the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “of the law of Moses” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 7:7

τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?

Paul uses this phrase to introduce a new topic. (See: Rhetorical Question)

μὴ γένοιτο

“Of course that is not true!” This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. See how you translated this in Romans 9:14.

τὴν ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ ἔγνων, εἰ μὴ διὰ νόμου

Paul is speaking of sin as if it were a person who can act. (See: Personification)

Romans 7:8

ἀφορμὴν δὲ λαβοῦσα ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς, κατειργάσατο ἐν ἐμοὶ πᾶσαν ἐπιθυμίαν;

Paul continues comparing sin to a person who can act. (See: Personification)

χωρὶς…νόμου, ἁμαρτία νεκρά

Alternate translation: “if there were no law, there would be no breaking of the law, so there would be no sin”

Romans 7:9

ἡ ἁμαρτία ἀνέζησεν

This could mean: (1) Paul realized that he was sinning. (2) Paul strongly desired to sin. (See: Personification)

Romans 7:10

εὑρέθη μοι ἡ ἐντολὴ, ἡ εἰς ζωὴν, αὕτη εἰς θάνατον.

Paul speaks of God’s commandment as if it resulted primarily in physical death. Alternate translation: “God gave me the commandment so I would live, but it killed me instead” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 7:11

ἡ γὰρ ἁμαρτία ἀφορμὴν λαβοῦσα διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς, ἐξηπάτησέν με καὶ δι’ αὐτῆς ἀπέκτεινεν

As in Romans 7:7-8, Paul is describing sin as a person who can do three things: take the opportunity, deceive, and kill. Alternate translation: “Because I wanted to sin, I deceived myself into thinking that I could sin and obey the commandment at the same time, but God punished me for disobeying the commandment by separating me from him” (See: Personification)

ἡ…ἁμαρτία

Alternate translation: “my desire to sin”

ἀπέκτεινεν

Paul speaks of sin as if it resulted primarily in physical death. Alternate translation: “it separated me from God” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 7:13

Paul talks about the struggle inside his inner man between sin in his inner man and his mind with the law of God—between sin and good.

οὖν

Paul is introducing a new topic.

τὸ…ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος?

Paul uses this question to add emphasis. (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὸ…ἀγαθὸν

This refers to God’s law.

ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος

Alternate translation: “did … cause me to die”

μὴ γένοιτο!

This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. Alternate translation: “Of course that is not true!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἡ ἁμαρτία…μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον;

Paul is viewing sin as though it were a person who could act. (See: Personification)

μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον

Alternate translation: “separated me from God”

διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς

Alternate translation: “because I disobeyed the commandment”

Romans 7:15

Paul talks about the struggle inside his inner man between his flesh and the law of God—between sin and good.

ὃ γὰρ κατεργάζομαι, οὐ γινώσκω

Alternate translation: “I am not sure why I do some of the things that I do”

ὃ γὰρ κατεργάζομαι

Alternate translation: “Because what I do”

οὐ…ὃ θέλω, τοῦτο πράσσω

The words I do not do are an exaggeration to emphasize that Paul does not do what he wants to do as often as he would like or that he does what he does not want to do too often. Alternate translation: “I do not always do what I want to do” (See: Hyperbole)

ὃ μισῶ, τοῦτο ποιῶ.

The words I do, which implies that he always does what he hates to do, are an exaggeration to emphasize that Paul does what he does not want to do too often. Alternate translation: “the things that I know are not good are the things that I sometimes do” (See: Hyperbole)

Romans 7:16

εἰ δὲ ὃ οὐ θέλω, τοῦτο ποιῶ

Alternate translation: “However, if I do what I do not want to do”

σύνφημι τῷ νόμῳ, ὅτι καλός

Alternate translation: “I know God’s law is good”

Romans 7:17

ἡ ἐνοικοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία

Paul describes sin as a living being that has the power to influence him. (See: Personification)

Romans 7:18

τῇ σαρκί μου

Here, flesh is a metonym for the sinful nature. Alternate translation: “my sinful nature” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 7:19

ἀγαθόν

Alternate translation: “the good deeds” or “the good actions”

κακὸν

Alternate translation: “the evil deeds” or “the evil actions”

Romans 7:20

ἀλλὰ ἡ οἰκοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία

Paul speaks of sin as if it were alive and living inside him. (See: Personification)

Romans 7:21

ὅτι ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται

Paul speaks of evil here as if it were alive and living inside him. (See: Personification)

Romans 7:22

τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον

This refers to the newly-revived spirit of a person who trusts in Christ. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 7:23

βλέπω δὲ ἕτερον νόμον ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου, ἀντιστρατευόμενον τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ νοός μου, καὶ αἰχμαλωτίζοντά με

Alternate translation: “But I am able only to do what my old nature tells me to do, not to live the new way the Spirit shows me”

τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ νοός μου

This refers to the new spiritually-alive nature.

ἕτερον νόμον ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου

This refers to the old nature, the way people are when they are born.

τῷ νόμῳ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, τῷ ὄντι ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου

Alternate translation: “my sinful nature”

Romans 7:24

τίς με ῥύσεται ἐκ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου?

Paul uses this question to express great emotion. If your language has a way of showing great emotion through an exclamation or a question, use it here. Alternate translation: “I want someone to set me free from the control of what my body desires!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

με ῥύσεται

Alternate translation: “will rescue me”

τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου

This is a metaphor that means a body that will experience physical death. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 7:25

χάρις τῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν

This is the answer to the question in 7:24.

ἄρα οὖν αὐτὸς ἐγὼ, τῷ μὲν νοῒ δουλεύω νόμῳ Θεοῦ; τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας

The mind and flesh are used here to show how they compare to serve either the law of God or the principle of sin. With the mind or intellect one can choose to please and obey God and with the flesh or physical nature to serve sin. Alternate translation: “My mind chooses to please God, but my flesh chooses to obey sin” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 8

Romans 8 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39)
   • Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14)
   • Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23)
   • Christians have been freed from the law (7:1–6)
   • Christians still struggle with indwelling sin (7:7–25)
   • The Holy Spirit dwells in Christians (8:1–27)
   • Christians have confidence in God’s love (8:28–8:39)

The first verse of this chapter is a transitional sentence. Paul concludes his teaching of Chapter 7 and leads into the words of Chapter 8.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 36. Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

Indwelling of the Spirit

The Holy Spirit is said to live inside a person or inside their heart. If the Spirit is present, this signifies that a person is saved. (See: save, saved, safe, salvation)

“These are sons of God”

Jesus is the Son of God in a unique way. God also adopts Christians to be his children. (See: Son of God, the Son and adoption, adopt, adopted)

Predestination

Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some to be eternally saved. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter, especially with regards to elements of causation. (See: predestine, predestined and save, saved, safe, salvation)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Metaphor

Paul poetically presents his teaching in verses 38 and 39 in the form of an extended metaphor. He explains that nothing can separate a person from the love of God in Jesus. (See: Metaphor)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

No condemnation

This phrase must be translated carefully to avoid doctrinal confusion. People are still guilty of their sin. God disapproves of acting sinfully, even after believing in Jesus. God still punishes the sins of believers, but Jesus has paid the punishment for their sin. This is what Paul expresses here. The word “condemn” has several possible meanings. Here Paul emphasizes that people who believe in Jesus are no longer punished eternally for their sin by being “condemned to hell.” (See: guilt, guilty and faith and condemn, condemned, condemnation)

Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: flesh)

Romans 8:1

Paul gives the answer to the struggle he has with sin and good.

οὐδὲν ἄρα νῦν κατάκριμα τοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

Here, condemnation refers to punishing people. Alternate translation: “God will not condemn and punish those who are joined to Christ Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἄρα

Alternate translation: “for that reason” or “because what I have just told you is true”

Romans 8:2

ὁ…νόμος τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

Here, the Spirit of life refers to God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the working of the Holy Spirit in Christ Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἠλευθέρωσέν σε ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου

Being set free from the law of sin and death is a metaphor for not being controlled by the law of sin and death. Alternate translation: “has caused the law of sin and death to no longer control you” (See: Metaphor)

τοῦ νόμου τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου

This could mean: (1) the law of Moses, which provokes people to sin, and their sin causes them to die. Alternate translation: “the law which causes sin and death” (2) Paul is stating the principle that people sin and die.

Romans 8:3

τὸ γὰρ ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός, ὁ Θεὸς

Here the law is described as a person who could not break the power of sin. Alternate translation: “For the law did not have the power to stop us from sinning, because the power of sin within us was too strong. But God did stop us from sinning” (See: Personification)

διὰ τῆς σαρκός

Alternate translation: “because of people’s sinful nature”

τὸν ἑαυτοῦ Υἱὸν πέμψας, ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας, καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας, κατέκρινε τὴν ἁμαρτίαν

The Son of God forever satisfied God’s holy anger against our sin by giving his own body and human life as the eternal sacrifice for sin.

Υἱὸν

Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας

Alternate translation: “who looked like any other sinful human being”

καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας

Alternate translation: “so that he could die as a sacrifice for our sins”

κατέκρινε τὴν ἁμαρτίαν ἐν τῇ σαρκί

Alternate translation: “God broke the power of sin through the body of his Son”

Romans 8:4

τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου πληρωθῇ ἐν ἡμῖν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “we might fulfill what the law requires” (See: Active or Passive)

τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν

Here, walking on a path is a metaphor for how a person lives his life. Alternate translation: “we who do not obey our sinful desires” (See: Metaphor)

τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν

Here, flesh is an idiom for sinful human nature. (See: Idiom)

ἀλλὰ κατὰ Πνεῦμα

Alternate translation: “but who obey the Holy Spirit”

Romans 8:6

Paul continues to contrast the flesh with the Spirit we now have.

τὸ…φρόνημα τῆς σαρκὸς…τὸ δὲ φρόνημα τοῦ Πνεύματος

Here Paul speaks of both the mind of the flesh and the mind of the Spirit as if they were living persons. Alternate translation: “the way sinful people think … the way people who listen to the Holy Spirit think” (See: Personification)

Romans 8:8

οἱ…ἐν σαρκὶ ὄντες

This refers to people who do what their sinful nature tells them to do.

Romans 8:9

ἐν σαρκὶ

“acting according to your sinful natures.” See how the flesh was translated in Romans 8:5.

ἐν Πνεύματι

Alternate translation: “acting according to the Holy Spirit”

Πνεύματι,…Πνεῦμα Θεοῦ…Πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ

These all refer to the Holy Spirit.

εἴπερ

This phrase does not mean Paul doubts that some of them have God’s Spirit. Paul wants them to realize that they all have God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “since” or “because”

Romans 8:10

εἰ…Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν

How Christ lives in a person could be made explicit. Alternate translation: “If Christ lives in you through the Holy Spirit” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρὸν διὰ ἁμαρτίαν

This could mean: (1) a person is spiritually dead to the power of sin. (2) the physical body will still die because of sin. (See: Idiom)

τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα ζωὴ διὰ δικαιοσύνην

This could mean: (1) a person is spiritually alive because God has given him power to do what is right. (2) God will bring the person back to life after he dies because God is righteous and gives believers eternal life. (See: Idiom)

Romans 8:11

εἰ δὲ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐκ νεκρῶν οἰκεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν

Paul assumes that the Holy Spirit lives in his readers. Alternate translation: “Since the Spirit of the one who raised Jesus from the dead lives in you”

τοῦ ἐγείραντος

Alternate translation: “of God, who raised”

ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν

Here “to raise” is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “who caused Jesus to live again” (See: Idiom)

τὰ θνητὰ σώματα ὑμῶν

Alternate translation: “your physical bodies” or “your bodies, which will die someday”

Romans 8:12

ἄρα οὖν

Alternate translation: “Because what I have just told you is true”

ἀδελφοί

Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.

ὀφειλέται ἐσμέν

Paul is speaking of obedience as if it were paying back a debt. Alternate translation: “we need to obey” (See: Metaphor)

οὐ τῇ σαρκὶ, τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν

You can include the implied word “debtors.” Alternate translation: “but we are not debtors to the flesh, and we do not have to obey our sinful desires” (See: Ellipsis)

Romans 8:13

εἰ γὰρ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆτε

Alternate translation: “Because if you live only to please your sinful desires”

μέλλετε ἀποθνῄσκειν

Alternate translation: “you will certainly be separated from God”

εἰ δὲ Πνεύματι τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος θανατοῦτε

Paul speaks of not doing sinful deeds as putting them to death. Alternate translation: “but if by the power of the Holy Spirit you stop obeying your sinful desires” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 8:14

ὅσοι γὰρ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ἄγονται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For all the people whom the Spirit of God leads” (See: Active or Passive)

υἱοί Θεοῦ

Here, sons of God refers to all believers in Jesus.

Romans 8:15

ἐν ᾧ κράζομεν

Alternate translation: “who causes us to cry out”

Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ

Abba is the word for Father in the Aramaic language. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Romans 8:17

κληρονόμοι μὲν Θεοῦ

Paul speaks of the Christian believers as if they will inherit property and wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “we also will one day receive what God has promised us” (See: Metaphor)

συνκληρονόμοι…Χριστοῦ

Paul speaks of the Christian believers as if they will inherit property and wealth from a family member. God will give to us what he gives to Christ. Alternate translation: “we will also receive what God has promised us and Christ together” (See: Metaphor)

ἵνα καὶ συνδοξασθῶμεν

God will honor Christian believers when he honors Christ. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “that God may glorify us along with him” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 8:18

Paul reminds us as believers that our bodies will be changed at the redemption of our bodies in this section which ends in Romans 8:25.

γὰρ

This emphasizes I consider. Here, it does not mean “because.”

λογίζομαι…ὅτι οὐκ ἄξια τὰ παθήματα τοῦ νῦν καιροῦ, πρὸς

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “I cannot compare the sufferings of this present time with” (See: Active or Passive)

μέλλουσαν…ἀποκαλυφθῆναι

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “that God will reveal” or “that God will make known” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 8:19

ἡ…ἀποκαραδοκία τῆς κτίσεως, τὴν…ἀπεκδέχεται

Paul describes everything that God created as a person who eagerly waits for something. (See: Personification)

τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “for the time when God will reveal his sons” (See: Active or Passive)

τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here refers to all believers in Jesus.

Romans 8:20

τῇ γὰρ ματαιότητι, ἡ κτίσις ὑπετάγη

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For God caused what he had created to be unable to achieve what he intended” (See: Active or Passive)

οὐχ ἑκοῦσα, ἀλλὰ διὰ τὸν ὑποτάξαντα

Here Paul describes “creation” as a person who can desire. Alternate translation: “not because this is what the created things wanted, but because it is what God wanted” (See: Personification)

Romans 8:21

αὐτὴ ἡ κτίσις ἐλευθερωθήσεται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will save creation” (See: Active or Passive)

ἀπὸ τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς

Here being in slavery to decay is a metaphor for being certain to decay. Alternate translation: “from being destined to decay” (See: Metaphor)

εἰς τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης τῶν τέκνων τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, freedom is in contrast with slavery to decay. It is a metaphor meaning that the creation will not decay. Alternate translation: “that it will become gloriously free from decay like the children of God” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 8:22

οἴδαμεν γὰρ ὅτι πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις συνστενάζει καὶ συνωδίνει ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν

The creation is compared to a woman who groans while giving birth to a baby. Alternate translation: “For we know that everything that God created wants to be free and groans for it like a woman giving birth” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 8:23

υἱοθεσίαν ἀπεκδεχόμενοι

Here, our adoption refers to when we will become full members of God’s family, as adopted sons. Alternate translation: “waiting for when we are fully members of God’s family” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν τοῦ σώματος ἡμῶν

Here, the word redemption means when God saves us. Alternate translation: “when he saves our bodies from decay and death” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 8:24

τῇ γὰρ ἐλπίδι ἐσώθημεν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For God saved us because we hoped in him” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐλπὶς δὲ βλεπομένη, οὐκ ἔστιν ἐλπίς; ὃ γὰρ βλέπει τις, ἐλπίζει?

Paul uses a question to help his audience understand what hope is. Alternate translation: “But if we are confidently waiting, that means we do not yet have what we want. No one can confidently wait if he already has what he wants” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 8:26

Though Paul has been emphasizing that there is a struggle in believers between the flesh and the Spirit, he affirms that the Spirit is aiding us.

στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις

Alternate translation: “with groanings that we cannot express in words”

Romans 8:27

ὁ…ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας

Here, the one refers to God.

ὁ…ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας

Here, hearts is a metonym for a person’s thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “God, who searches all our thoughts and feelings” (See: Metonymy)

ὁ…ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας

The phrase searches the hearts is a metaphor for examining thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “God, who knows all our thoughts and feelings” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 8:28

Paul reminds the believers that nothing can separate them from God’s love.

τοῖς…κλητοῖς οὖσιν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “for those whom God chose” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 8:29

οὓς προέγνω

Alternate translation: “those whom he knew before he even created them”

καὶ προώρισεν

Alternate translation: “he also made it their destiny” or “he also planned in advance for them”

συμμόρφους τῆς εἰκόνος τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ

God planned from before the beginning of creation to grow those who believe in Jesus, the Son of God, into persons who are like Jesus. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “that he would change them to be like his Son” (See: Active or Passive)

τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ

Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν πρωτότοκον

Alternate translation: “so that his Son would be the firstborn”

ἐν πολλοῖς ἀδελφοῖς

Here, brothers refers to all believers, both male and female. Alternate translation: “among many brothers and sisters who belong to the family of God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 8:30

οὓς…προώρισεν

Alternate translation: “those whom God made plans for in advance”

τούτους καὶ ἐδικαίωσεν

Here, justified is in the past tense to emphasize that this will certainly happen. Alternate translation: “these he also put right with himself” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τούτους καὶ ἐδόξασεν

The word glorified is in the past tense to emphasize that this will certainly happen. Alternate translation: “these he will also glorify” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 8:31

τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν πρὸς ταῦτα? εἰ ὁ Θεὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, τίς καθ’ ἡμῶν?

Paul uses questions to emphasize the main point of what he said previously. Alternate translation: “This is what we should know from all of this: since God is helping us, no one can defeat us!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 8:32

ὅς γε τοῦ ἰδίου Υἱοῦ οὐκ ἐφείσατο

God the Father sent the Son of God, Jesus Christ, to the cross as the holy, infinite sacrifice necessary to satisfy God’s infinite, holy nature against the sin of humanity. Here, Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἀλλὰ…παρέδωκεν αὐτόν

Alternate translation: “but put him under the control of his enemies”

πῶς οὐχὶ καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ, τὰ πάντα ἡμῖν χαρίσεται?

Paul is using a question for emphasis. Alternate translation: “he will certainly and freely give us all things!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

πῶς οὐχὶ καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ, τὰ πάντα ἡμῖν χαρίσεται

Alternate translation: “he will certainly also kindly give us all things”

Romans 8:33

τίς ἐγκαλέσει κατὰ ἐκλεκτῶν Θεοῦ? Θεὸς ὁ δικαιῶν.

Paul uses a question for emphasis. Alternate translation: “No one can accuse us before God because he is the one who makes us right with him!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 8:34

τίς ὁ κατακρινῶν?

Paul uses a question for emphasis. He does not expect an answer. Alternate translation: “No one will condemn us!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὅς, καί ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ

To be at the right hand of God is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “who is at the place of honor beside God” (See: Symbolic Action)

Romans 8:35

τίς ἡμᾶς χωρίσει ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Χριστοῦ?

Paul uses this question to teach that nothing can separate us from the love of Christ. Alternate translation: “No one will ever separate us from the love of Christ!” or “Nothing will ever separate us from the love of Christ!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα?

The words “shall separate us from the love of Christ” are understood from the previous question. Alternate translation: “Shall tribulation, or distress, or persecution, or hunger, or nakedness, or danger, or sword separate us from the love of Christ?”(See: Ellipsis)

θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα?

Paul uses this question to emphasize that even these things cannot separate us from the love of Christ. Alternate translation: “Even tribulation, distress, persecution, hunger, nakedness, danger, and sword cannot separate us from the love of Christ!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα

The abstract nouns can be expressed with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “Even if people cause us trouble, hurt us, take away our clothes and food, or kill us, they cannot separate us from the love of Christ.” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἢ μάχαιρα

Here, sword is a metonym that represents being killed violently. Alternate translation: “or being killed” (See: Metonymy)

θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία

These words both mean the same thing. (See: Doublet)

Romans 8:36

ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ

Here, your is singular and refers to God. Alternate translation: “For you” (See: Forms of You)

θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν

Here, we refers to the one who wrote this part of Scripture, but not his audience, who was God. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν

The phrase all day long is an exaggeration to emphasize how much danger they are in. Paul uses this part of Scripture to show that all who belong to God should expect difficult times. Alternate translation: “we are continually killed” (See: Hyperbole)

θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “our enemies continually seek to kill us” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς

Here Paul compares to livestock those whom people kill because they are loyal to God. Alternate translation: “Our lives are considered of no more value to them than the sheep they kill” (See: Simile)

ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Our lives have no more value to them than the sheep they kill” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 8:37

ὑπερνικῶμεν

Alternate translation: “we have complete victory”

διὰ τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς

You can make explicit the kind of love that Jesus showed. Alternate translation: “because of Jesus, who loved us so much he was willing to die for us” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 8:38

πέπεισμαι

Alternate translation: “I am confident”

ἀρχαὶ

This could refer to: (1) demons. (2) human kings and rulers.

οὔτε δυνάμεις

This could refer to: (1) spiritual beings with power. (2) human beings with power.

Romans 9

Romans 9 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36)
   • Paul’s sorrow for Israel’s unbelief (9:1–5)
   • God chooses whom he wants to choose (9:6–13)
   • God shows mercy on whom he wants to show mercy (9:14–18)
   • No one can question God’s choice (9:19–33)

In this chapter, Paul changes what he is teaching about. In Chapters 9-11, he focuses on the nation of Israel.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 25-29 and 33 of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

Flesh

Paul uses the word “flesh” in this chapter only to refer to Israelites, people physically descending from Abraham through Jacob, who God named Israel. (See: flesh)

In other chapters, Paul uses the word “brother” to mean fellow Christians. However, in this chapter, he uses “my brothers” to mean his kinsmen the Israelites.

Paul refers to those who believe in Jesus as “children of God” and “children of the promise.”

Predestination

Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches extensively on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to eternally save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: predestine, predestined and save, saved, safe, salvation)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Stone of stumbling

Paul explains that while some Gentiles accepted Jesus as their savior by believing in him, most Jews were trying to earn their salvation and so rejected Jesus. Paul, quoting the Old Testament, describes Jesus as a stone that the Jews stumble over when walking. This “stone of stumbling” causes them to “fall.” (See: Metaphor)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“It is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel”

Paul uses the word “Israel” in this verse with two different meanings. The first “Israel” means the physical descendants of Abraham through Jacob. The second “Israel” means those who are God’s people through faith. The UST reflects this.

Romans 9:1

Paul tells of his personal desire that the people of the nation of Israel will be saved. Then he emphasizes the different ways in which God has prepared them to believe.

ἀλήθειαν λέγω ἐν Χριστῷ, οὐ ψεύδομαι

These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is telling the truth. (See: Doublet)

συνμαρτυρούσης μοι τῆς συνειδήσεώς μου ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ

Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit controls my conscience and confirms what I say”

Romans 9:2

ὅτι λύπη μοί ἐστιν μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη τῇ καρδίᾳ μου

Here, unceasing pain in my heart is an idiom that Paul uses to share his emotional distress. Alternate translation: “I tell you that I grieve very greatly and deeply” (See: Idiom)

λύπη…μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη

These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them together to emphasize how great his emotions are. (See: Doublet)

Romans 9:3

ηὐχόμην γὰρ ἀνάθεμα εἶναι αὐτὸς, ἐγὼ ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “I personally would be willing to let God curse me and, keep me apart from Christ forever” (See: Active or Passive)

τῶν ἀδελφῶν

Here, brothers means fellow Christians, including both men and women.

Romans 9:4

οἵτινές εἰσιν Ἰσραηλεῖται

Alternate translation: “who, like me, are Israelites”

ὧν ἡ υἱοθεσία

Here Paul uses the metaphor of adoption to indicate that the Israelites are like God’s children. Alternate translation: “who have God as their father” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 9:6

Paul emphasizes that those who are born in the family of Israel can really only be a true part of Israel through faith.

οὐχ οἷον δὲ, ὅτι ἐκπέπτωκεν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ

Alternate translation: “But God has not failed to keep his promises” or “But God has kept his promises”

οὐ γὰρ πάντες οἱ ἐξ Ἰσραήλ οὗτοι, Ἰσραήλ

God did not make his promises to all the physical descendants of Israel (or Jacob), but to his spiritual descendants, that is, those who trust in Jesus.

Romans 9:7

οὐδ’ ὅτι εἰσὶν σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ πάντες τέκνα

Alternate translation: “Nor are they all children of God just because they are Abraham’s descendants”

Romans 9:8

τὰ τέκνα τῆς σαρκὸς,

Here, children of the flesh is a metonym that refers to the physical descendants of Abraham. Alternate translation: “all of Abraham’s descendants” (See: Metonymy)

οὐ…ταῦτα τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ

The phrase children of God is a metaphor that refers to people who are spiritual descendants, those who have faith in Jesus. (See: Metaphor)

τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐπαγγελίας

The phrase children of the promise refers to people who will inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham.

Romans 9:9

ἐπαγγελίας…ὁ λόγος οὗτος

Alternate translation: “these are the words God used when he made the promise”

ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός

You can translate this in an active form to express that God will give a son to Sarah. Alternate translation: “I will give Sarah a son” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 9:10

τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν

Paul refers to Isaac as our father because Isaac was the ancestor of Paul and of the Jewish believers in Rome. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

κοίτην, ἔχουσα

Alternate translation: “had become pregnant”

Romans 9:11

μήπω γὰρ γεννηθέντων, μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον

Alternate translation: “before the children were born and before they had done anything, whether good or bad”

ἵνα ἡ κατ’ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις τοῦ Θεοῦ μένῃ

Alternate translation: “so that what God wants to happen according to His choice will happen”

μήπω γὰρ γεννηθέντων

Alternate translation: “before the children were born”

μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον

Alternate translation: “not because of anything they had done”

Romans 9:12

It may be necessary in your language to place this verse between verse 10 and verse 11: “our father Isaac, it was said to her, ‘The older will serve the younger.’ Now the children were not yet born and had not yet done anything good or bad, but so that the purpose of God according to choice might stand—not because of actions, but because of him who calls. It is just”

ἐκ τοῦ

because of God

ἐρρέθη αὐτῇ, ὅτι ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι

Alternate translation: “God said to Rebecca, ‘The older son will serve the younger son’”

Romans 9:13

τὸν Ἰακὼβ ἠγάπησα, τὸν δὲ Ἠσαῦ ἐμίσησα

The word hated is an exaggeration. God loved Jacob much more than he loved Esau. He did not literally hate Esau. (See: Hyperbole)

Romans 9:14

τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?

Paul is using the question to get the attention of his readers. (See: Rhetorical Question)

μὴ γένοιτο!

“That is not possible!” or “Certainly not!” This expression strongly denies that this could happen. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here.

Romans 9:15

τῷ Μωϋσεῖ γὰρ λέγει

Paul speaks about God’s talking with Moses as if it is being done in the present time. Alternate translation: “For God said to Moses” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 9:16

οὐ τοῦ θέλοντος, οὐδὲ τοῦ τρέχοντος

Alternate translation: “it is not because of what people want or because they try hard”

οὐδὲ τοῦ τρέχοντος

Paul speaks of a person who does good things in order to gain God’s favor as if that person were running a race. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 9:17

λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφὴ

Here the scripture is personified as if God were talking to Pharaoh. Alternate translation: “For the scripture records that God said” (See: Personification)

ἐξήγειρά σε…ἐνδείξωμαι…μου

Here the pronouns I and my refer to God as the speaker.

σε

Here, you is singular and refers to Pharaoh. (See: Forms of You)

ἐξήγειρά σε

Here, raised is an idiom for causing something to be what it is. Alternate translation: “I made you the powerful man that you are” (See: Idiom)

ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄνομά μου

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “so that people might proclaim my name” (See: Active or Passive)

τὸ ὄνομά μου

Here, name is a metonym that could refer to: (1) God in all of his being. Alternate translation: “who I am” (2) God’s reputation. Alternate translation: “how great I am” (See: Metonymy)

ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ

“wherever there are people” (See: Hyperbole)

Romans 9:18

ὃν δὲ θέλει, σκληρύνει

God makes stubborn whoever he wishes to make stubborn.

Romans 9:19

ἐρεῖς μοι οὖν

Paul is talking to the critics of his teaching as though he were only talking to one person. You may need to use the plural here. (See: Forms of You)

τί οὖν ἔτι μέμφεται? τῷ γὰρ βουλήματι αὐτοῦ, τίς ἀνθέστηκεν?

These rhetorical questions are complaints against God. You can translate them as strong statements. Alternate translation: “He should not find fault with us. No one has ever been able to withstand his will.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

μέμφεται…αὐτοῦ

The words he and his here refer to God.

τῷ…βουλήματι αὐτοῦ, τίς ἀνθέστηκεν

Alternate translation: “who has ever stopped him from doing what he wanted to do”

Romans 9:20

μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως?

Paul uses the potter’s right to make any kind of container he wants from the clay as a metaphor for the creator’s right to do whatever he wants with his creation. (See: Metaphor)

μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως?

Paul asks questions to emphasize his point. You can translate this as a strong statement. Alternate translation: “What a person has molded should never say to the one who molds it, ‘Why did you make me this way?’!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως

This question is a rebuke and can be translated as a strong statement. Alternate translation: “You should not have made me this way!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 9:21

ἢ οὐκ ἔχει ἐξουσίαν ὁ κεραμεὺς τοῦ πηλοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ φυράματος ποιῆσαι ὃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος, ὃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν?

This rhetorical question is a rebuke. Alternate translation: “The potter certainly has the right over the clay to make from the same lump a container for special occasions, but another for daily use.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 9:22

σκεύη ὀργῆς

Paul speaks of people as if they were containers. Alternate translation: “people who deserve wrath” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 9:23

γνωρίσῃ…αὐτοῦ

The pronouns he and his here refer to God.

σκεύη ἐλέους

Paul speaks of people as if they were containers. Alternate translation: “people who deserve mercy” (See: Metaphor)

τὸν πλοῦτον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ

Paul compares God’s wonderful actions here to great riches. Alternate translation: “his glory, which is of great value, upon” (See: Metaphor)

ἃ προητοίμασεν εἰς δόξαν

Here, glory refers to life in heaven with God. Alternate translation: “whom he prepared ahead of time in order that they might live with him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 9:24

καὶ…ἡμᾶς

The pronoun us here refers to Paul and fellow believers. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἐκάλεσεν

Here, called means God has appointed or chosen people to be his children, to be his servants and proclaimers of his message of salvation through Jesus.

Romans 9:25

In this section Paul explains how Israel’s unbelief as a nation was told ahead of time by the prophet Hosea.

ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ Ὡσηὲ λέγει

Here, he refers to God. Alternate translation: “As God says also in the book that Hosea wrote” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῷ Ὡσηὲ

Hosea was an Old Testament prophet. (See: How to Translate Names)

καλέσω τὸν οὐ λαόν μου, λαόν μου

Alternate translation: “I will choose for my people those who were not my people”

τὴν οὐκ ἠγαπημένην, ἠγαπημένην

Here, the one refers to Hosea’s wife, Gomer, who represents the nation of Israel. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “I will choose her whom I did not love to be one whom I love” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 9:26

υἱοὶ Θεοῦ ζῶντος

The word living may refer to the fact that God is the only true God, and not like the false idols. Alternate translation: “children of the true God”

Romans 9:27

κράζει

Alternate translation: “calls out”

ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης

Here Paul compares the number of the people of Israel to the number of grains of sand in the sea. Alternate translation: “too many to count” (See: Simile)

σωθήσεται

Paul uses the word saved in a spiritual sense. If God saves a person, it means that through believing in Jesus’ death on the cross, God has forgiven him and rescued him from being punished for his sin. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will save” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 9:28

λόγον…ποιήσει Κύριος ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς

Here, word refers to how he has decided to punish people. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish people on the earth according to how he has said”

Romans 9:29

ἡμῖν…ἂν ἐγενήθημεν

Here the pronouns us and we refer to Isaiah and those to whom he spoke. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν

God killed all of the people of Sodom and Gomorrah because of their sin. Alternate translation: “we all would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom and Gomorrah” or “God would have destroyed all of us, like he destroyed the cities of Sodom and Gommorah” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 9:30

τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?

Paul uses this question to get the attention of his readers. Alternate translation: “This is what we must say.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὅτι ἔθνη

Alternate translation: “We will say that the Gentiles”

τὰ μὴ διώκοντα δικαιοσύνην

Alternate translation: “who were not trying to please God”

δικαιοσύνην…τὴν ἐκ πίστεως

Here, by faith refers to placing one’s trust in Christ. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “because God made them right with him when they trusted in Christ” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 9:31

εἰς νόμον οὐκ ἔφθασεν

This means that the Israelites could not please God by trying to keep the law. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “were not able to please God by keeping the law because they could not keep it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 9:32

διὰ τί?

This is an ellipsis. You can include the implied words in your translation. Alternate translation: “Why could they not attain righteousness?” (See: Ellipsis)

διὰ τί?

Paul asks this question to get the attention of his readers. (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὡς ἐξ ἔργων

This refers to things that people do to try to please God. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “by trying to do things that would please God” or “by keeping the Law” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 9:33

καθὼς γέγραπται

You can indicate that Isaiah wrote this. Alternate translation: “just as it has been written by Isaiah the prophet” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καθὼς γέγραπται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “as Isaiah the prophet wrote” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐν Σιὼν

Here, Zion is a metonym that represents Israel. Alternate translation: “in Israel” (See: Metonymy)

λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου

Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. (See: Doublet)

λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου

These phrases are metaphors that refer to Jesus and his death on the cross. It was as if the people stumbled over a stone because they were disgusted when they considered Jesus’ death on the cross. (See: Metaphor)

πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ

Because the stone stands for a person, you may need to translate this as “who believes in him.”

Romans 10

Romans 10 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36)
   • Paul’s sorrow for Israel’s unbelief (9:1–5)
   • God chooses whom he wants to choose (9:6–13)
   • God shows mercy on whom he wants to show mercy (9:14–18)
   • No one can question God’s choice (9:19–33)
   • Israel’s false righteousness (10:1–4)
   • Salvation is available to everyone (10:5–21)

Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 8.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 18-20 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

God’s righteousness

Paul teaches here that while many Jews earnestly tried to be righteous, they did not succeed. We cannot earn God’s righteousness. God gives us Jesus’ righteousness when we believe in him. (See: righteous, righteousness, unrighteous, unrighteousness, upright, uprightness and faith)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Rhetorical questions

Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He does this to convince his readers that God does not save only the Hebrew people, so Christians must be ready to go and share the gospel with the whole world. (See: Rhetorical Question and save, saved, safe, salvation)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“I will provoke you to jealousy by what is not a nation”

Paul uses this prophecy to explain that God will use the church to make the Hebrew people jealous. This is so they will seek God and believe the gospel. (See: prophet, prophecy, prophesy, seer, prophetess and jealous, jealousy and Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 10:1

Paul continues stating his desire for Israel to believe but emphasizes that both those who are Jews as well as everyone else can only be saved by faith in Jesus.

ἀδελφοί

Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.

ἡ μὲν εὐδοκία τῆς ἐμῆς καρδίας

Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s emotions or inner being. Alternate translation: “my greatest desire” (See: Metonymy)

ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν εἰς σωτηρίαν

Alternate translation: “is that God will save the Jews”

Romans 10:2

μαρτυρῶ…αὐτοῖς

Alternate translation: “I declare truthfully about them”

Romans 10:3

ἀγνοοῦντες γὰρ τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην

Here, righteousness refers to the way God puts people right with himself. You can make this explicit in the translation. Alternate translation: “For they do not know how God puts people right with himself” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐχ ὑπετάγησαν

Alternate translation: “they did not accept God’s way of putting people right with himself”

Romans 10:4

τέλος γὰρ νόμου Χριστὸς

Alternate translation: “For Christ completely fulfilled the law”

εἰς δικαιοσύνην παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι

Here, believes means “trusts.” Alternate translation: “in order that he may make everyone who trusts in him right before God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 10:5

τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου

Alternate translation: “how the law makes a person right before God”

ὅτι ὁ ποιήσας αὐτὰ ἄνθρωπος, ζήσεται ἐν αὐτῇ

In order to be made right with God through the law, a person would have to keep the law perfectly, which is not possible. Alternate translation: “The person who perfectly obeys the law will live because the law will make him right before God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ζήσεται

Here, will live could refer to: (1) eternal life. (2) mortal life in fellowship with God.

Romans 10:6

ἡ δὲ ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη οὕτως λέγει

Here, righteousness is described as a person who can speak. Alternate translation: “But Moses writes this about how faith makes a person right before God” (See: Personification)

μὴ εἴπῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου

Moses was addressing the people as if he were speaking to only one person. The pronoun your is singular. (See: Forms of You)

μὴ εἴπῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου

Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner being. Alternate translation: “Do not say to yourself” (See: Metonymy)

τίς ἀναβήσεται εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?

Moses uses a question to teach his audience. His previous instruction of, “Do not say” requires a negative answer to this question. You can translate this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one is able to go up to heaven” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τοῦτ’ ἔστιν Χριστὸν καταγαγεῖν

Alternate translation: “in order that they might have Christ come down to earth”

Romans 10:7

τίς καταβήσεται εἰς τὴν Ἄβυσσον?

Moses uses a question to teach his audience. His previous instruction of, “Do not say” requires a negative answer to this question. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “No person can go down and enter the place where the spirits of dead persons are” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἐκ νεκρῶν

From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld.

νεκρῶν

Here, the dead speaks of physical death.

Romans 10:8

ἀλλὰ τί λέγει?

The word it refers to “the righteousness” of Romans 10:6. Here Paul describes righteousness as a person who can speak. Alternate translation: “But this is what Moses says?” (See: Personification)

ἀλλὰ τί λέγει?

Paul uses a question to emphasize the answer he is about to give. (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν

Paul speaks of God’s word as if it were a person who can move. Alternate translation: “You have heard the message” (See: Personification)

ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, καὶ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου

The word mouth is a metonym that refers to what a person says. Alternate translation: “You can hear and know how to speak and think about God’s message” (See: Metonymy)

ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου

The phrase in your heart is metonym that refers to what a person thinks and believes. Alternate translation: “and you know what it means” (See: Metonymy)

τὸ ῥῆμα τῆς πίστεως

Alternate translation: “God’s message that tells us that we must believe in him”

Romans 10:9

ἐὰν ὁμολογήσῃς ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, Κύριον Ἰησοῦν

Alternate translation: “if you verbally confess that Jesus is Lord”

πιστεύσῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου

Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner person. Alternate translation: “believe in your mind” or “truly believe” (See: Metonymy)

αὐτὸν ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν

Here, raised here is an idiom for “caused to live again.” Alternate translation: “caused him to live again” (See: Idiom)

σωθήσῃ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 10:10

καρδίᾳ γὰρ πιστεύεται εἰς δικαιοσύνην, στόματι δὲ ὁμολογεῖται εἰς σωτηρίαν

Here, heart is a metonym that represents the mind or will. Alternate translation: “For it is with the mind that a person trusts and is right before God, and it is with the mouth that a person confesses and God saves him” (See: Metonymy)

στόματι

Here, mouth is a synecdoche that represents a person’s capacity to speak. (See: Synecdoche)

Romans 10:11

λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφή

Paul speaks of the scripture as if it were alive and had a voice. (See: Personification)

λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφή

You can make explicit who wrote the scripture that Paul uses here. Alternate translation: “For Isaiah wrote in the scriptures” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ οὐ καταισχυνθήσεται

This is equivalent to: “Everyone who does not believe will be shamed.” The negative is used here for emphasis. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will honor everyone who believes in him” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 10:12

οὐ γάρ ἐστιν διαστολὴ Ἰουδαίου τε καὶ Ἕλληνος

Paul implies that God will treat all people the same. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “In this way, God treats the Jews and the non-Jews the same” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πλουτῶν εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους αὐτόν

Here, being rich means that God blesses richly. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “and he richly blesses all who trust in him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 10:13

πᾶς γὰρ ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται

Here the word name is a metonym for Jesus. (See: Metonymy)

πᾶς γὰρ ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For the Lord will save everyone who trusts in him” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 10:14

πῶς οὖν ἐπικαλέσωνται εἰς ὃν οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν?

Paul uses a question to emphasize the importance of taking the good news of Christ to those who have not heard. The word they refers to those who do not yet belong to God. Alternate translation: “Those who do not believe in God cannot call on him!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

πῶς…πιστεύσωσιν οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν?

Paul uses another question for the same reason. Alternate translation: “they cannot believe in him if they have not heard his message!” or “they cannot believe in him if they have not heard the message about him!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

πιστεύσωσιν

Here this means to acknowledge that what that person has said is true.

πῶς…ἀκούσωσιν χωρὶς κηρύσσοντος?

Paul uses another question for the same reason. Alternate translation: “they cannot hear the message if someone does not tell them!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 10:15

ὡς ὡραῖοι οἱ πόδες τῶν εὐαγγελιζομένων τὰ ἀγαθά!

Paul uses feet to represent those who travel and bring the message to those who have not heard it. Alternate translation: “It is wonderful when messengers come and tell us the good news” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 10:16

οὐ πάντες ὑπήκουσαν

Here, them refers to the Jews. “not all of the Jews obeyed”

Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν?

Paul is using this question to emphasize that Isaiah prophesied in the Scriptures that many Jews would not believe in Jesus. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “Lord, so many of them do not believe our message.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν

Here, our refers to God and Isaiah.

Romans 10:17

ἡ πίστις ἐξ ἀκοῆς

Here, faith refers to “believing in Christ”

ἡ…ἀκοὴ διὰ ῥήματος Χριστοῦ

Alternate translation: “hearing by listening to the message about Christ”

Romans 10:18

ἀλλὰ λέγω, μὴ οὐκ ἤκουσαν? μενοῦνγε

Paul uses a question for emphasis. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “But, I say the Jews certainly have heard the message about Christ” (See: Rhetorical Question)

εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν

Both of these statements mean basically the same thing and Paul uses them for emphasis. (See: Parallelism)

εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν

The word their refers to the sun, moon, and stars. Here they are described as human messengers that tell people about God. This refers to how their existence shows God’s power and glory. Alternate translation: “The sun, moon, and the stars are proof of God’s power and glory, and everyone in the world sees them and knows the truth about God.” (See: Personification)

εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν

You can make explicit that Paul is quoting Scripture here. Alternate translation: “As the Scriptures record, ‘The sun, moon, and the stars are proof of God’s power and glory, and everyone in the world sees them and knows the truth about God.’” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 10:19

ἀλλὰ λέγω, μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω?

Paul uses a question for emphasis. Alternate translation: “Again I tell you that Israel did know the message.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἀλλὰ λέγω, μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω?

The word Israel is a metonym for the people who lived in the nation of Israel. Alternate translation: “Again I tell you the people of Israel did know the message” (See: Metonymy)

πρῶτος Μωϋσῆς λέγει

This means that Moses wrote down what God said. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς,…παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς

Both instances of I refer to God, and you refers to the Israelites. Alternate translation: “God will provoke you … God will stir you up to anger.” (See: Forms of You)

ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει

Alternate translation: “by those you do not consider to be a real nation” or “by people who do not belong to any nation”

ἐπ’ ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ

Here, without understanding means that the people do not know God. Alternate translation: “by a nation with people who do not know me or my commands” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς

Alternate translation: “I will make you angry” or “I will cause you to become angry”

ὑμᾶς

Here, you refers to the nation of Israel. (See: Forms of You)

Romans 10:20

Here the words I, “me,” and “my” refer to God.

Ἠσαΐας δὲ ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει

This means the prophet Isaiah wrote what God had said.

εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν

Prophets often speak of things in the future as if they have already happened. This emphasizes that the prophecy will certainly come true.

εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Even though the Gentile people will not look for me, they will find me” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην

Alternate translation: “I made myself known”

λέγει

He refers to God, who is speaking through Isaiah.

Romans 10:21

ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν

This phrase is used to emphasize God’s continual effort. “Continually”

ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα

The action of reaching out a hand represents offering help to a person. Alternate translation: “I tried to welcome you and to help you, but you refused my help and continued to disobey” (See: Symbolic Action)

Romans 11

Romans 11 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36)
   • Paul’s sorrow for Israel’s unbelief (9:1–5)
   • God chooses whom he wants to choose (9:6–13)
   • God shows mercy on whom he wants to show mercy (9:14–18)
   • No one can question God’s choice (9:19–33)
   • Israel’s false righteousness (10:1–4)
   • Salvation is available to everyone (10:5–21)
   • Israel has a faithful remnant (11:1–10)
   • Israel’s unbelief resulted in non-Jews’ belief (11:11–24)
   • God will save Israel (11:15–32)
   • Praise for God’s wisdom (11:33–11:36)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-10, 26-27, and 34-35, which are words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

Grafting

Paul uses the image of “grafting” to refer to the place of the Gentiles and Jews in the plans of God. Making one plant to be permanently part of another plant is called “grafting.” Paul uses the picture of God grafting the Gentiles as a wild branch into his saving plans. But God has not forgotten about the Jews, who are spoken of as the natural plant. God will also save Jews who believe in Jesus.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“Did God reject his people? May it never be”

Whether Israel (the physical descendants of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob) has a future in the plans of God, or if they have been replaced in the plans of God by the church, is a major theological issue in Chapters 9-11. This phrase is an important part of this section of Romans. It seems to indicate that Israel remains distinct from the church. Not all scholars arrive at this conclusion. Despite their currently rejecting Jesus as their Messiah, Israel has not exhausted the grace and mercy of God. (See: Christ, Messiah and grace, gracious and mercy, merciful)

Romans 11:1

Though Israel as a nation has rejected God, God wants them to understand salvation comes by grace without works.

λέγω οὖν

Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say then”

μὴ ἀπώσατο ὁ Θεὸς τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ?

Paul asks this question so that he can answer the questions of other Jews who are upset that God has included the Gentiles among his people, while the hearts of the Jewish people have been hardened. (See: Rhetorical Question)

μὴ γένοιτο

“That is not possible!” or “Certainly not!” This expression strongly denies that this could happen. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. See how you translated this in Romans 9:14.

φυλῆς Βενιαμείν

This refers to the tribe descended from Benjamin, one of the 12 tribes into which God divided the people of Israel.

Romans 11:2

ὃν προέγνω

Alternate translation: “whom he knew ahead of time”

ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν Ἠλείᾳ τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή, ὡς ἐντυγχάνει τῷ Θεῷ κατὰ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ?

You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you know what the Scriptures record about when Elijah pleaded with God against Israel” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή

Paul is referring to the scriptures as if they were able to speak. (See: Personification)

Romans 11:3

ἀπέκτειναν

Here, they refers to the people of Israel.

κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος

The pronoun I here refers to Elijah.

ζητοῦσιν τὴν ψυχήν μου

Alternate translation: “they want to kill me”

Romans 11:4

ἀλλὰ τί λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ χρηματισμός?

Paul is using this question to bring the reader to his next point. Alternate translation: “How does God answer him?” (See: Rhetorical Question)

αὐτῷ

The pronoun him refers to Elijah.

Romans 11:5

λῖμμα

Here this means a small part of people whom God chose to receive his grace.

Romans 11:6

εἰ δὲ χάριτι

Paul continues to explain how God’s mercy works. Alternate translation: “But since God’s mercy works by grace” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 11:7

τί οὖν?

“What should we conclude?” Paul asks this question to move his reader to his next point. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “This is what we need to remember.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 11:8

ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα κατανύξεως, ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, καὶ ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν

This is a metaphor about the fact that the people are spiritually dull. They are not able to hear or receive spiritual truth. (See: Metaphor)

πνεῦμα κατανύξεως

Here, spirit means “the characteristics of,” such as the “spirit of wisdom.”

ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν

The concept of seeing with one’s eyes was considered to be equivalent to gaining understanding.

ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν

The concept of hearing with the ears was considered to be equivalent to obedience.

Romans 11:9

γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν

Here, table here is a metonym that represents feasting. Alternate translation: “Please, God, make their feasts become like a trap” (See: Metonymy)

γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν

Here, net and trap are metaphors that represent punishment. Alternate translation: (See: Metaphor)

γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Please, God, make their feasts like a trap that catches them” (See: Active or Passive)

σκάνδαλον

A stumbling block is anything that causes a person to trip so that he falls down. Here it represents something that tempts a person to sin. Alternate translation: “something that tempts them to sin” (See: Metaphor)

ἀνταπόδομα αὐτοῖς

Alternate translation: “something that allows you to take revenge on them”

Romans 11:10

τὸν νῶτον αὐτῶν διὰ παντὸς σύνκαμψον

Here, make their backs bend is a metonym for forcing slaves to carry heavy loads on their backs. Alternate translation: “make them continually carry heavy loads” (See: Metonymy)

τὸν νῶτον αὐτῶν διὰ παντὸς σύνκαμψον

This is a metaphor for making them suffer. Alternate translation: “make them continually suffer like people carrying heavy loads” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:11

With Israel as a nation rejecting God, Paul warns the Gentiles to be careful they do not make the same mistake.

μὴ ἔπταισαν ἵνα πέσωσιν?

Paul uses this question to add emphasis. Alternate translation: “Has God rejected them forever because they sinned?” (See: Rhetorical Question)

μὴ γένοιτο!

“That is not possible!” or “Certainly not!” This expression strongly denies that this could happen. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. See how you translated this in Romans 9:14.

παραζηλῶσαι αὐτούς

See how you translated this phrase in Romans 10:19.

Romans 11:12

εἰ…τὸ παράπτωμα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος κόσμου, καὶ τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος ἐθνῶν

Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. If you need to, you can combine them in your translation. Alternate translation: “when the Jews failed spiritually, the result was that God abundantly blessed the non-Jews” (See: Doublet)

πλοῦτος ἐθνῶν

Because the Jews rejected Christ, God richly blessed the Gentiles by giving them the opportunity to receive Christ.

κόσμου

Here the world is a metonym that refers to the people who live in the world, especially the Gentiles.

Romans 11:14

παραζηλώσω

See how you translated this phrase in Romans 10:19.

μου τὴν σάρκα

This refers to Paul’s fellow Jews.

καὶ σώσω τινὰς ἐξ αὐτῶν

God will save those who believe. Alternate translation: “and perhaps some will believe and God will save them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 11:15

εἰ γὰρ ἡ ἀποβολὴ αὐτῶν καταλλαγὴ κόσμου

Alternate translation: “For if because God rejected them, he will reconcile the rest of the world to himself”

ἡ ἀποβολὴ αὐτῶν

The pronoun their refers to Jewish unbelievers.

κόσμου

Here, the world is a metonym for the people who live in the world. Alternate translation: “the people in the world” (See: Metonymy)

τίς ἡ πρόσλημψις εἰ μὴ ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν?

Paul asks this question to emphasize that when God accepts the Jews, it will be a wonderful thing. Alternate translation: “how will it be when God accepts them? It will be like they have come back to life from among the dead!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τίς ἡ πρόσλημψις εἰ μὴ ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν?

You can translate it in an active form. Alternate translation: “then when God accepts them, it will be like they have died and become alive again!” (See: Active or Passive)

νεκρῶν

These words speak of all dead people together in the underworld.

Romans 11:16

εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀπαρχὴ ἁγία, καὶ τὸ φύραμα;

Paul is speaking of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the Israelites’ ancestors, as if they were the first grain or firstfruits to be harvested. He is also speaking of the Israelites who are descendants of those men as if they were a lump of dough that they made from the grain. Alternate translation: “If Abraham is counted as the first of what has been offered to God, all of our ancestors who followed should also be counted as God’s possession” (See: Metaphor)

εἰ ἡ ῥίζα ἁγία, καὶ οἱ κλάδοι

Paul is speaking of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the Israelites’ ancestors, as if they were the root of a tree, and the Israelites who are descendants of those men, as if they were the branches of the tree. (See: Metaphor)

ἁγία

The people always dedicated to God the first crops that they harvested. Here, “firstfruits” stands for the first people to believe in Christ. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:17

εἰ δέ τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν

Here Paul refers to the Jews who rejected Jesus as branches that were broken off. (See: Metaphor)

εἰ δέ τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “But if someone broke off some of the branches” (See: Active or Passive)

σὺ δὲ ἀγριέλαιος ὢν

The pronoun you, and the phrase a wild olive branch, refer to the Gentile people who have accepted salvation through Jesus.

ἐνεκεντρίσθης ἐν αὐτοῖς

Here Paul speaks of the Gentile Christians as if they were grafted into the faith of Abraham and the Jewish patriarchs. (See: Metaphor)

ἐνεκεντρίσθης ἐν αὐτοῖς

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God attached you to the tree among the remaining branches” (See: Active or Passive)

τῆς ῥίζης τῆς πιότητος τῆς ἐλαίας ἐγένου

Here, the richness of the root is a metaphor that refers to the promises of God. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:18

μὴ κατακαυχῶ τῶν κλάδων

Here, the branches is a metaphor that stands for the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “do not say you are better than the Jewish people God has rejected” (See: Metaphor)

οὐ σὺ τὴν ῥίζαν βαστάζεις, ἀλλὰ ἡ ῥίζα σέ

Again Paul implies that the Gentile believers are branches that are connected to the root of the faith of the Abraham and the Jewish patriarchs. God saves them only because of the covenant promises that he made to the Jews. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:19

ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι

Branches here refer to the Jews who rejected Jesus and whom God has now rejected. (See: Metaphor)

ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God broke branches off” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ

Paul uses this phrase to refer to the Gentile believers whom God has accepted. (See: Metaphor)

ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “he might attach me in” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 11:20

τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ ἐξεκλάσθησαν

The pronouns They and their refer to the Jewish people who did not believe.

σὺ δὲ τῇ πίστει ἕστηκας

Paul speaks of the Gentile believers remaining faithful as if they were standing firm and no one could move them. Alternate translation: “but you remain because of your faith” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:21

εἰ γὰρ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν κατὰ φύσιν κλάδων οὐκ ἐφείσατο, οὐδὲ σοῦ φείσεται

Here the natural branches refer to the Jewish people who rejected Jesus. Alternate translation: “Since God did not spare those unbelieving Jews, who grew up like a tree’s natural branches that came from the root, then know, if you do not believe, he will not spare you either” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:22

χρηστότητα καὶ ἀποτομίαν Θεοῦ

Paul is reminding the Gentile believers that although God may act very kindly toward them, he will not hesitate to judge and punish them.

ἐπὶ μὲν τοὺς πεσόντας, ἀποτομία; ἐπὶ δὲ σὲ, χρηστότης Θεοῦ

This can be restated to remove the abstract nouns severity and kindness. Alternate translation: “God dealt harshly with the Jews who fell, but God acts kindly toward you” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τοὺς πεσόντας

Doing what is wrong is spoken of as if it is falling down. Alternate translation: “the Jews who have done wrong” or “the Jews who have refused to trust in Christ” (See: Metaphor)

ἐὰν ἐπιμένῃς τῇ χρηστότητι

This can be restated to remove the abstract noun kindness. Alternate translation: “if you continue doing what is right so that he continues being kind to you” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐπεὶ καὶ σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ

Paul again uses the metaphor of a branch, which God can cut off if he needs to. Here, cut off is a metaphor for rejecting someone. Alternate translation: “Otherwise you will be rejected” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπεὶ καὶ σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Otherwise God will cut you off” or “Otherwise God will reject you” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 11:23

ἐὰν μὴ ἐπιμένωσι τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ

The phrase do not continue in their unbelief is a double negative. You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “if the Jews start believing in Christ” (See: Double Negatives)

ἐνκεντρισθήσονται

Paul speaks of the Jews as if they were branches that could be grafted back into a tree if they start to believe in Jesus. (See: Metaphor)

ἐνκεντρισθήσονται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will graft them back in” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐνκεντρίσαι

This is a common process where the end of a live branch of one tree is inserted into another tree so that the new branch will continue to grow in that tree.

κἀκεῖνοι…αὐτούς

The occurrences of they and them refer to the Jews.

Romans 11:24

εἰ γὰρ σὺ ἐκ τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἐξεκόπης ἀγριελαίου, καὶ παρὰ φύσιν ἐνεκεντρίσθης εἰς καλλιέλαιον, πόσῳ μᾶλλον οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐλαίᾳ

Paul continues speaking of the Gentile believers and Jews as if they were branches of a tree. (See: Metaphor)

εἰ γὰρ σὺ ἐκ τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἐξεκόπης ἀγριελαίου, καὶ παρὰ φύσιν ἐνεκεντρίσθης εἰς καλλιέλαιον, πόσῳ μᾶλλον οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐλαίᾳ?

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For if God had cut you out of what is by nature a wild olive tree, and contrary to nature had grafted you into a good olive tree, how much more will he graft these Jews, who are the natural branches, into their own olive tree?” (See: Active or Passive)

οἱ κατὰ φύσιν

Paul continues speaking of the Jews and Gentiles as if they were branches. The branches according to nature represent the Jews who were originally connected to the faith of Abraham and the Jewish patriarchs. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:25

οὐ…θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν

Here Paul uses a double negative. You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “I very much want you to be aware” (See: Double Negatives)

ἀδελφοί

Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.

θέλω

Here the pronoun I refers to Paul.

ὑμᾶς…ἦτε…ἑαυτοῖς

The pronouns you and yourselves refer to the Gentile believers.

ἵνα μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι

Paul does not want the Gentile believers to think they are wiser than the Jewish unbelievers. Alternate translation: “so that you will not think you are wiser than you are” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πώρωσις ἀπὸ μέρους τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γέγονεν

Paul speaks of stubbornness as if it were a hardening of physical organs in the body. Some Jews have refused to accept salvation through Jesus. Alternate translation: “many people of Israel continue to be stubborn” (See: Metaphor)

ἄχρι οὗ τὸ πλήρωμα τῶν ἐθνῶν εἰσέλθῃ

The word until here implies that a portion Jews will refuse to believe until after God has finished bringing the Gentiles into the church.

Romans 11:26

Paul says that a deliverer will come out of Israel to the glory of God.

καὶ οὕτως πᾶς Ἰσραὴλ σωθήσεται

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and thus God will save all Israel” (See: Active or Passive)

καθὼς γέγραπται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “just as the scriptures record” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐκ Σιὼν

Here, Zion is used as a metonym for the place where God dwells. Alternate translation: “From where God is among the Jews” (See: Metonymy)

ὁ ῥυόμενος

Alternate translation: “the one who brings his people to safety”

ἀποστρέψει ἀσεβείας

Paul speaks of ungodliness as if it were an object that someone could remove, perhaps like someone removes a garment. (See: Metaphor)

ἀπὸ Ἰακώβ

Here, Jacob is used as a metonym for Israel. Alternate translation: “from the Israelite people” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 11:27

ἀφέλωμαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν

Here Paul speaks of sins as if they were objects that someone could take away. Alternate translation: “I will remove the burden of their sins” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:28

κατὰ μὲν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον

You can make explicit why Paul mentions the gospel. Alternate translation: “Because the Jews rejected the gospel” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐχθροὶ δι’ ὑμᾶς

You can make explicit whose enemies they are, and how this was for the Gentiles’ sake. Alternate translation: “they are God’s enemies for your sake” or “God has treated them as enemies in order that you also might hear the gospel” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κατὰ…τὴν ἐκλογὴν

You can make explicit why Paul mentions election. Alternate translation: “because God has elected the Jews” or “because God has chosen the Jews” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀγαπητοὶ διὰ τοὺς πατέρας

You can make explicit who loves the Jews and why Paul mentions their forefathers. Alternate translation: “they are loved by God because of what he promised to do for their ancestors” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀγαπητοὶ διὰ τοὺς πατέρας

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God still loves them because of what he promised to do for their ancestors” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 11:29

ἀμεταμέλητα γὰρ τὰ χαρίσματα καὶ ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul speaks of the spiritual and material blessings that God promised to give his people as if they were gifts. (See: Metaphor)

ἀμεταμέλητα γὰρ τὰ χαρίσματα καὶ ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ

The call of God refers to the fact that God called the Jews to be his people. Alternate translation: “For God never changed his mind about what he has promised to give them, and about how he has called them to be his people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 11:30

ὑμεῖς ποτε ἠπειθήσατε

Alternate translation: “you did not obey in the past”

ἠλεήθητε τῇ τούτων ἀπειθείᾳ

Here, mercy means God’s undeserved blessings. Alternate translation: “because the Jews have rejected Jesus, you have received blessings that you did not deserve” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὑμεῖς

Here, you refers to Gentile believers, and is plural. (See: Forms of You)

Romans 11:32

συνέκλεισεν…ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς πάντας εἰς ἀπείθειαν

God has treated people who disobey him like prisoners who are unable to escape from prison. Alternate translation: “God has made prisoners of those who disobey him. Now they cannot stop disobeying God” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 11:33

ὦ βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ

Here, wisdom and knowledge mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “How amazing are the many benefits of both God’s wisdom and knowledge!” (See: Doublet)

ὡς ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “We are completely unable to understand the things that he has decided and find out the ways in which he acts toward us”

Romans 11:34

τίς γὰρ ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο?

Paul uses this question to emphasize that no one is as wise as the Lord. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one has ever known the mind of the Lord, and no one has become his advisor.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

νοῦν Κυρίου

Here, mind is a metonym for knowing things or thinking about things. Alternate translation: “all that the Lord knows” or “what the Lord thinks about” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 11:35

ἢ τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ?

Paul uses this question to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “No one has ever given anything to God that he did not first receive from God” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Romans 11:36

ἐξ αὐτοῦ, καὶ δι’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἰς αὐτὸν, τὰ πάντα. αὐτῷ

Here, all occurrences of him refer to God. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας

This expresses Paul’s desire for all people to honor God. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “May all people honor him forever” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 12

Romans 12 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)
   • How to act toward God (12:1–2)
   • How to serve the church (12:3–8)
   • How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)
   • How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)
   • How to act toward government (13:1–7)
   • How to act toward other people (13:8–10)
   • Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)
   • Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12)
   • Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23)
   • Be united with other Christians (15:1–13)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 20, which are from the Old Testament.

Many scholars believe Paul uses the word therefore in Romans 12:1 to refer back to all of Chapters 1-11. Having carefully explained the Christian gospel, Paul now explains how Christians should live in light of these great truths. Chapters 12-16 focus on living out one’s Christian faith. Paul uses many different commands in these chapters to give these practical instructions. (See: faith)

Special concepts in this chapter

Christian living

Under the law of Moses, people were required to offer temple sacrifices of animals or grain. Now Christians are required to live their lives as a type of sacrifice to God. Physical sacrifices are no longer required. (See: law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Body of Christ

The body of Christ is an important metaphor or image used in Scripture to refer to the church. Each church member plays a unique and important function. Christians need each other. (See: body and Metaphor)

Romans 12:1

Paul tells what the life of a believer should be and how believers should serve.

παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, διὰ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, brothers refers to fellow believers, both male and female. Alternate translation: “Fellow believers, because of the great mercy that God has given you I very much want you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν

Here Paul uses the word bodies to refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “to offer yourselves completely to God as a living sacrifice” (See: Synecdoche)

παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν

Paul is comparing a believer in Christ who completely obeys God to the animals that the Jews killed and then offered to God. Alternate translation: “to offer yourselves completely to God while you are alive as if you were a dead sacrifice on a temple altar” (See: Metaphor)

ἁγίαν, εὐάρεστον, τῷ Θεῷ

This could refer to: (1) a sacrifice that you give to God alone and that pleases him. (2) a sacrifice that is acceptable to God because it is morally pure. (See: Doublet)

τὴν λογικὴν λατρείαν ὑμῶν

Alternate translation: “which is the right way to worship God”

Romans 12:2

μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ

This could mean: (1) do not behave as the world behaves. (2) do not think the way the world does. (See: Metaphor)

μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “do not act and think like the world does” (See: Active or Passive)

τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ

Here, this world refers to unbelievers who live in the world. (See: Metonymy)

ἀλλὰ μεταμορφοῦσθε τῇ ἀνακαινώσει τοῦ νοός

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “but let God change the way you think” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 12:3

διὰ τῆς χάριτος τῆς δοθείσης μοι

Here, grace refers to God’s choosing Paul to be an apostle and leader of the church. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “through the grace that caused me to become an apostle” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

διὰ τῆς χάριτος τῆς δοθείσης μοι

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “because God freely chose me to be an apostle” (See: Active or Passive)

παντὶ τῷ ὄντι ἐν ὑμῖν, μὴ ὑπερφρονεῖν παρ’ ὃ δεῖ φρονεῖν

Alternate translation: “that no one among you should think they are better than they are”

ἀλλὰ φρονεῖν εἰς τὸ σωφρονεῖν

Alternate translation: “but you should be wise in how you think about yourselves”

ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ Θεὸς ἐμέρισεν μέτρον πίστεως

Paul implies here that believers have different abilities that correspond to their faith in God. Alternate translation: “since God has given each of you the faith to trust in him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 12:4

γὰρ

Paul the word For to show that he will now explain why some Christians should not think they are better than others.

ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, πολλὰ μέλη ἔχομεν

Paul refers to all the believers in Christ as if they were different parts of the human body. He does this to illustrate that although believers may serve Christ in different ways, each person belongs to Christ and serves in an important way. (See: Metaphor)

μέλη

Here, members are such things as eyes, stomachs, and hands.

Romans 12:5

τὸ δὲ καθ’ εἷς ἀλλήλων μέλη

Paul speaks of the believers as if God had physically joined them together like the parts of the human body. (See: Metaphor)

τὸ δὲ καθ’ εἷς ἀλλήλων μέλη

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God has joined each believer together with all other believers” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 12:6

ἔχοντες δὲ χαρίσματα κατὰ τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν διάφορα

Paul speaks of believers’ different abilities as being free gifts from God. (See: Metaphor)

ἔχοντες δὲ χαρίσματα κατὰ τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν διάφορα

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God has freely given each of us the ability to do different things for him” (See: Active or Passive)

κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν τῆς πίστεως

This could mean: (1) he should speak prophecies that do not go beyond the amount of faith God has given us. (2) he should speak prophecies that agree with the teachings of our faith.

Romans 12:8

ὁ μεταδιδοὺς

Here, giving refers to giving money and other things to people. You can make this meaning explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “if one has the gift of giving money or other goods to people in need” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 12:9

ἡ ἀγάπη ἀνυπόκριτος

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “You must love people sincerely and truly” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡ ἀγάπη

The word Paul uses here refers to the kind of love that comes from God and focuses on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself.

Romans 12:10

τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ

This is another word that means brotherly love or love for a friend or family member. This is natural human love between friends or relatives.

τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ…φιλόστοργοι

Here Paul begins a list of nine items, each of the form in … be to tell the believers what kind of people they should be. You may need to translate some of the items as “in … do.” The list continues to Romans 12:13.

τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ

Alternate translation: “as for how you love your fellow believers”

τῇ τιμῇ ἀλλήλους προηγούμενοι

Alternate translation: “honor and respect one another” or “honor your fellow believers by respecting them”

Romans 12:11

τῇ σπουδῇ μὴ ὀκνηροί, τῷ πνεύματι ζέοντες, τῷ Κυρίῳ δουλεύοντες

Alternate translation: “do not be lazy in your duty, but be eager to follow the Spirit and to serve the Lord”

Romans 12:12

τῇ θλίψει ὑπομένοντες

Alternate translation: “wait patiently whenever you have troubles”

Romans 12:13

ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων κοινωνοῦντες

Alternate translation: “when fellow Christians are in trouble, help them with what they need”

τὴν φιλοξενίαν διώκοντες

This is the last item in the list that began in Romans 12:9. “always welcome them into your home when they need a place to stay”

Romans 12:16

τὸ αὐτὸ εἰς ἀλλήλους φρονοῦντες

This is an idiom that means to live in unity. Alternate translation: “agreeing with one another” or “living in unity with each other” (See: Idiom)

μὴ τὰ ὑψηλὰ φρονοῦντες

Alternate translation: “do not think that you are more important than others”

τοῖς ταπεινοῖς συναπαγόμενοι

Alternate translation: “welcome people who do not seem important”

μὴ γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς

Alternate translation: “Do not think of yourselves as having more wisdom than everyone else”

Romans 12:17

μηδενὶ κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ ἀποδιδόντες

Alternate translation: “do not do evil things to someone who has done evil things to you”

προνοούμενοι καλὰ ἐνώπιον πάντων ἀνθρώπων

Alternate translation: “do things that everyone considers to be good”

Romans 12:18

τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν, μετὰ πάντων ἀνθρώπων εἰρηνεύοντες

Alternate translation: “do whatever you can to live in peace with everyone”

Romans 12:19

δότε τόπον τῇ ὀργῇ

Here, wrath is a metonym for God’s punishment. Alternate translation: “allow God to punish them” (See: Metonymy)

γέγραπται γάρ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “for someone has written” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω

These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that God will avenge his people. Alternate translation: “I will certainly avenge you” (See: Parallelism)

Romans 12:20

ὁ ἐχθρός σου…σωρεύσεις

The pronouns your and you are singular and addressed as to one person. (See: Forms of You)

ἀλλὰ ἐὰν πεινᾷ ὁ ἐχθρός σου, ψώμιζε αὐτόν; ἐὰν διψᾷ, πότιζε αὐτόν; τοῦτο γὰρ ποιῶν, ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ.

In 12:20 Paul quotes another part of scripture. Alternate translation: “But the scripture also says, ‘If your enemy is hungry, feed him. If he is thirsty, give him a drink. For doing this, you will heap coals of fire on his head’”

ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ

Paul speaks of the blessings that the enemies will receive as if someone were pouring hot coals on their heads. This could mean: (1) you will make the person who harmed you feel badly about how he has mistreated you. (2) you will give God a reason to judge your enemy more harshly. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 12:21

μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα ἐν τῷ ἀγαθῷ τὸ κακόν

Paul describes evil as though it were a person. (See: Personification)

μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Do not let those who are evil defeat you” (See: Active or Passive)

μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα…τὸ κακόν

These verbs are addressed as to one person and so are singular.

Romans 13

Romans 13 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)
   • How to act toward God (12:1–2)
   • How to serve the church (12:3–8)
   • How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)
   • How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)
   • How to act toward government (13:1–7)
   • How to act toward other people (13:8–10)
   • Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)

In the first part of this chapter, Paul teaches Christians to obey rulers who govern them. At that time, ungodly Roman rulers governed the land. (See: godly, godliness, ungodly, godless, ungodliness, godlessness)

Special concepts in this chapter

Ungodly rulers

When Paul teaches about obeying rulers, some readers will find this difficult to understand, especially in places where rulers persecute the church. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God, unless the rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do. There are times when a believer must submit to these rulers and suffer at their hands. Christians understand that this world is temporary and they will ultimately be with God forever. (See: eternity, everlasting, eternal, forever)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: flesh and sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

Romans 13:1

Paul tells believers how to live under their rulers.

πᾶσα ψυχὴ…ὑποτασσέσθω

Here, soul is a synecdoche for the whole person. “Let every Christian obey” or “Everyone should obey” (See: Synecdoche)

ἐξουσίαις ὑπερεχούσαις

Alternate translation: “submit to government officials”

οὐ…ἔστιν ἐξουσία, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ Θεοῦ

This is a double negative. You can translate it in a positive form. Alternate translation: “all authority comes from God” (See: Double Negatives)

αἱ δὲ οὖσαι ὑπὸ Θεοῦ τεταγμέναι εἰσίν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “And the people who are in authority are there because God put them there” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 13:2

τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ

Alternate translation: “that government authority” or “the authority that God placed in power”

οἱ…ἀνθεστηκότες, ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will judge those who oppose government authority” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 13:3

γὰρ

Paul uses this word to begin his explanation of Romans 13:2 and to tell about what will result if the government condemns a person.

οἱ…ἄρχοντες οὐκ εἰσὶν φόβος

Rulers do not make good people afraid.

τῷ ἀγαθῷ ἔργῳ,…τῷ κακῷ

People are identified with their good deeds or evil deeds.

θέλεις δὲ μὴ φοβεῖσθαι τὴν ἐξουσίαν?

Paul uses this question to get people to think about what they need to do in order not to be afraid of rulers. Alternate translation: “Let me tell you how you can be unafraid of the ruler.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἕξεις ἔπαινον ἐξ αὐτῆς

The government will say good things about people who do what is good.

Romans 13:4

οὐ…εἰκῇ τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ

You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “he carries the sword for a very good reason” or “he has the power to punish people, and he will punish people” (See: Litotes)

τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ

Roman governors carried a short sword as a symbol of their authority. (See: Metonymy)

ἔκδικος εἰς ὀργὴν

Here, wrath represents the punishment people receive when they do evil deeds. Alternate translation: “a person who punishes people as an expression of the government’s anger against evil” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 13:5

οὐ μόνον διὰ τὴν ὀργὴν, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν

Alternate translation: “not only so the government will not punish you, but also so you will have a clear conscience before God”

Romans 13:6

διὰ τοῦτο

Alternate translation: “because the government punishes evildoers”

τελεῖτε

Paul is addressing the believers here, so this verb is plural.

γὰρ…εἰσιν

Alternate translation: “This is why you should pay taxes: authorities are”

Romans 13:7

ἀπόδοτε πᾶσι

Paul is addressing the believers here, so this verb is plural.

τῷ τὸν φόρον, τὸν φόρον; τῷ τὸ τέλος, τὸ τέλος; τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν

The word “pay” is understood from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “pay tax to whom tax is due and toll to whom toll is due. Pay fear to whom fear is due and honor to him to whom honor is due” (See: Ellipsis)

τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν

Here paying fear and honor is a metaphor for fearing and honoring those who deserve to be feared and honored. Alternate translation: “Fear those who deserve to be feared, and honor those who deserved to be honored” or “Respect those whom you ought to respect, and honor those whom you ought to honor” (See: Metaphor)

τὸ τέλος

This is a kind of tax.

Romans 13:8

Paul tells believers how to act toward neighbors.

μηδενὶ μηδὲν ὀφείλετε, εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους ἀγαπᾶν

This is a double negative. You can translate it in a positive form. Alternate translation: “Pay all you owe to everyone, and fulfill your obligation to love one another” (See: Double Negatives)

εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους ἀγαπᾶν

This is the one debt that can remain.

ὀφείλετε

This verb is plural and applies to all the Christians in Rome.

ἀγαπᾶν

This refers to the kind of love that comes from God and focuses on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself.

Romans 13:10

ἡ ἀγάπη τῷ πλησίον κακὸν οὐκ ἐργάζεται

This phrase portrays love as a person who is being kind to other people. Alternate translation: “People who love their neighbors do not harm them” (See: Personification)

Romans 13:11

εἰδότες τὸν καιρόν, ὅτι ὥρα ἤδη ὑμᾶς ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι

Paul speaks of the need for the Roman believers to change their behavior as if they needed to wake up from being asleep. (See: Metaphor)

Romans 13:12

ἡ νὺξ προέκοψεν

Paul speaks of the time when people do evil deeds as night. Alternate translation: “The sinful time is almost over” or “It is as though the night is almost finished” (See: Metaphor)

ἡ…ἡμέρα ἤγγικεν

Paul speaks of the time when people do what is right as the day. Alternate translation: “the time of righteousness will begin soon” or “it is as though it will soon be day” (See: Metaphor)

ἀποθώμεθα οὖν τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους

Paul speaks of works of darkness as if they are clothing that a person puts aside. Here to put aside means to stop doing something. Here, darkness is a metaphor for evil. Alternate translation: “Let us therefore stop doing the evil things that people do in the dark” (See: Metaphor)

ἐνδυσώμεθα…τὰ ὅπλα τοῦ φωτός

Here, light is a metaphor for what is good and right. Paul speaks of doing what is right as if it were putting on armor to protect one’s self. Alternate translation: “let us start doing what is right. Doing this will protect us from what is evil like armor protects a solider” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 13:13

περιπατήσωμεν

Paul includes his readers and other believers with himself. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ὡς ἐν ἡμέρᾳ εὐσχημόνως περιπατήσωμεν

Paul speaks of living as true believers as if one were walking while it is day. Alternate translation: “Let us walk in a visible way knowing that everyone can see us” (See: Metaphor)

κοίταις καὶ ἀσελγείαις

These concepts mean basically the same thing. You can combine them in your translation. Alternate translation: “in sexually immoral acts” (See: Doublet)

ἔριδι

This refers to plotting against and arguing with other people.

Romans 13:14

ἐνδύσασθε τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν

Paul speaks of accepting the moral nature of Christ as if he were our outer clothing that people can see. (See: Metaphor)

ἐνδύσασθε

If your language has a plural form for commands, use it here.

τῆς σαρκὸς πρόνοιαν μὴ ποιεῖσθε

Here the flesh refers to the self-directed nature of people who oppose God. This is the sinful nature of human beings. Alternate translation: “do not allow your old evil heart any opportunity at all for doing wicked things” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 14

Romans 14 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)
   • How to act toward God (12:1–2)
   • How to serve the church (12:3–8)
   • How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)
   • How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)
   • How to act toward government (13:1–7)
   • How to act toward other people (13:8–10)
   • Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)
   • Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12)
   • Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 11 of this chapter, which Paul quotes from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

Weak in faith

Paul teaches that Christians can have real faith and at the same time be “weak in faith” in a given situation. This describes Christians whose faith is immature, not strong, or misunderstood. (See: faith)

Dietary restrictions

Many religions in the ancient Near East restricted what was eaten. Christians have freedom to eat what they want. But they need to use this freedom wisely, in a way that honors the Lord and does not cause others to sin. (See: sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

The judgment seat of God

The judgment seat of God or Christ represents a time when all people, including Christians, will be held accountable for the way they lived their lives.

Romans 14:1

Paul encourages believers to remember that they are answerable to God.

ἀσθενοῦντα τῇ πίστει

This refers to those who felt guilty over eating and drinking certain things.

μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν

Alternate translation: “and do not condemn them for their opinions”

Romans 14:2

ὃς μὲν πιστεύει φαγεῖν πάντα

Some people believe God permits them to eat any kind of food.

ὁ…ἀσθενῶν λάχανα ἐσθίει

This describes a person who believes God does not want him to eat meat.

Romans 14:4

σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ κρίνων ἀλλότριον οἰκέτην?

Paul is using a question to scold those who are judging others. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “You are not God, and you are not allowed to judge one of his servants!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

σὺ…ὁ κρίνων

The form of you here is singular. (See: Forms of You)

τῷ ἰδίῳ κυρίῳ στήκει ἢ πίπτει

Paul speaks of God as if he were a master who owned slaves. Alternate translation: “Only the master can decide if he will accept the slave or not” (See: Metaphor)

σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν

Paul speaks of the servant who is acceptable to God as if he were being made to stand instead of falling. (See: Metaphor)

σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “But the Lord will accept him because he is able to make the servant acceptable” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 14:5

ὃς μὲν κρίνει ἡμέραν παρ’ ἡμέραν; ὃς δὲ κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν.

Alternate translation: “One person thinks one day is more important than all the others, but another person thinks that all days are the same”

ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω

You can make the full meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “Let each person be convinced that he is honoring the Lord by what he does” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Let each person be sure what he is doing is to honor the Lord” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 14:6

ὁ φρονῶν τὴν ἡμέραν, Κυρίῳ φρονεῖ

Here, observes refers to worshiping. Alternate translation: “The person who worships on a certain day does it to honor the Lord” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ ἐσθίων

The word “everything” is understood from Romans 14:3. It can be repeatd here. Alternate translation: “the person who eats every kind of food” (See: Ellipsis)

Κυρίῳ ἐσθίει

Alternate translation: “eats to honor the Lord” or “eats that way in order to honor the Lord”

καὶ ὁ μὴ ἐσθίων

The word “everything” is understood from Romans 14:3. It can be repeated here. Alternate translation: “and he who does not eat everything” or “and the person who does not eat certain kinds of food” (See: Ellipsis)

Romans 14:7

οὐδεὶς γὰρ ἡμῶν ἑαυτῷ ζῇ

Here, lives for himself means to live only to please oneself. Alternate translation: “None of us should live merely to please ourselves” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐδεὶς…ἡμῶν

Paul is including his readers, so this is inclusive. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

οὐδεὶς ἑαυτῷ ἀποθνῄσκει

This means anyone’s death affects other people. Alternate translation: “none of us should think that when we die, it affects only us” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 14:8

Paul is speaking of both himself and his readers, so all instances of “we” are inclusive. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Romans 14:10

τί κρίνεις τὸν ἀδελφόν σου? ἢ καὶ σὺ τί ἐξουθενεῖς τὸν ἀδελφόν σου?

By using these questions, Paul is demonstrating how he might need to scold individuals among his readers. Alternate translation: “it is wrong for you to judge your brother, and it is wrong for you to despise your brother!” or “stop judging and despising your brother!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὸν ἀδελφόν

Here, brother means a fellow Christian, male or female.

πάντες γὰρ παραστησόμεθα τῷ βήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ

The judgment seat refers to God’s authority to judge. Alternate translation: “For God will judge us all” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 14:11

γέγραπται γάρ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For someone has written in the scriptures:” (See: Active or Passive)

ζῶ ἐγώ

This phrase is used to start an oath or solemn promise. Alternate translation: “You can be certain that this is true” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ

Paul uses the word God and tongue to refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “every person will bow and give praise to God” (See: Synecdoche)

ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ

The Lord uses the word God to refer to himself. Alternate translation: “every person will bow and give praise to me” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Romans 14:12

περὶ ἑαυτοῦ, λόγον δώσει τῷ Θεῷ

Alternate translation: “will have to explain our actions to God”

Romans 14:13

ἀλλὰ τοῦτο κρίνατε μᾶλλον, τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ ἢ σκάνδαλον

Here, stumbling block and snare mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “but instead make it your goal not to do or say anything that might cause a fellow believer to sin” (See: Doublet)

τῷ ἀδελφῷ

Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian, male or female.

Romans 14:14

οἶδα καὶ πέπεισμαι ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ

Here the words know and am persuaded mean basically the same thing; Paul uses them to emphasize his certainty. Alternate translation: “I am certain because of my relationship with the Lord Jesus” (See: Doublet)

οὐδὲν κοινὸν δι’ ἑαυτοῦ

You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “everything by itself is clean” (See: Double Negatives)

δι’ ἑαυτοῦ

Alternate translation: “by its nature” or “because of what it is”

εἰ μὴ τῷ λογιζομένῳ τι κοινὸν εἶναι, ἐκείνῳ κοινόν

Paul implies here that a person should stay away from anything that he thinks is unclean. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “but if a person thinks something is unclean, then for that person it is unclean and he should stay away from it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 14:15

εἰ…διὰ βρῶμα, ὁ ἀδελφός σου λυπεῖται

“If you hurt your fellow believer’s faith over the matter of food.” Here the word your refers to those who are strong in faith and brother refers to those who are weak in faith.

ὁ ἀδελφός

Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian, male or female.

οὐκέτι κατὰ ἀγάπην περιπατεῖς

Paul speaks of the behavior of believers as if it were a walk. Alternate translation: “then you are no longer showing love” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 14:16

μὴ βλασφημείσθω οὖν ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν

Alternate translation: “If someone else thinks that something is evil, do not do it, even if you consider it to be good”

Romans 14:17

οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ βρῶσις καὶ πόσις, ἀλλὰ δικαιοσύνη, καὶ εἰρήνη, καὶ χαρὰ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ

Paul argues that God set up his kingdom so he could give us a right relationship with himself, and to provide peace and joy. Alternate translation: “For God did not set up his kingdom so that he could rule over what we eat and drink. He set up his kingdom so we could have a right relationship with him, and so he could give us peace and joy” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 14:18

δόκιμος τοῖς ἀνθρώποις

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “people will approve of him” or “people will respect him” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 14:19

τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης διώκωμεν, καὶ τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς τῆς εἰς ἀλλήλους

Here, build up one another refers to helping each other grow in faith. Alternate translation: “let us seek to live peacefully together and help one another grow stronger in faith” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 14:20

μὴ ἕνεκεν βρώματος, κατάλυε τὸ ἔργον τοῦ Θεοῦ

You can make explicit the full meaning of this sentence. Alternate translation: “Do not undo what God has done for a fellow believer just because you want to eat a certain kind of food” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀλλὰ κακὸν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τῷ διὰ προσκόμματος ἐσθίοντι

Here a stumbling block is a food that a weaker brother eats despite thinking it is wrong, and thereby goes against his conscience. Alternate translation: “but it would be a sin for someone to eat food, which another brother thinks is wrong to eat, if by eating this causes the weaker brother to do something that is against his conscience” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 14:21

καλὸν τὸ μὴ φαγεῖν κρέα, μηδὲ πιεῖν οἶνον, μηδὲ ἐν ᾧ ὁ ἀδελφός σου προσκόπτει

Alternate translation: “It is better not to eat meat or drink wine or do anything else that might cause your brother to sin”

ὁ ἀδελφός

Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian, male or female.

σου

Here, you is singular and stresses the responsibility of each individual believer for his fellow believer. (See: Forms of You)

Romans 14:22

σὺ πίστιν ἣν ἔχεις

Here, faith refers back to the beliefs about food and drink.

σὺ…σεαυτὸν

Here, you and yourself are singular. Because Paul is addressing the believers, you may have to translate this using plural. (See: Forms of You)

μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτὸν ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει

Alternate translation: “Blessed are those who do not feel guilty for what they decide to do”

Romans 14:23

ὁ δὲ διακρινόμενος, ἐὰν φάγῃ, κατακέκριται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will say that the person does wrong if he is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but he eats it anyway” or “The person who is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but then eats it anyway will have a troubled conscience” (See: Active or Passive)

ὅτι οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως

Anything that is not from faith is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “God will say that he is wrong because he is eating something he believes God does not want him to eat” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πᾶν δὲ ὃ οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως, ἁμαρτία ἐστίν

Anything that is not from faith is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “you are sinning if you do something that you do not believe God wants you to do” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15

Romans 15 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)
   • How to act toward God (12:1–2)
   • How to serve the church (12:3–8)
   • How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)
   • How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)
   • How to act toward government (13:1–7)
   • How to act toward other people (13:8–10)
   • Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)
   • Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12)
   • Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23)
   • Be united with other Christians (15:1–13)
2. Conclusion (15:14–16:27)
   • Paul describes his mission (15:14–21)
   • Paul’s travel plans (15:22–33)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-11 and 21 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 12.

In Romans 15:14, Paul begins to speak more personally. He shifts from teaching to telling of his personal plans.

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Strong/Weak

These terms are used to refer to people who are mature and immature in their faith. Paul teaches that those who are strong in faith need to help those who are weak in faith. (See: faith)

Romans 15:1

Paul concludes this section about believers’ living for others with reminding them how Christ lived.

δὲ

Translate this using the words your language uses to introduce a new idea into an argument.

ἡμεῖς, οἱ δυνατοὶ

Here, strong refers to the people who are strong in their faith. They believe that God allows them to eat any kind of food. Alternate translation: “we who are strong in faith” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡμεῖς

This refers to Paul, his readers, and other believers. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

τῶν ἀδυνάτων

Here, the weak refers to the people who are weak in their faith. They believe that God does not allow them to eat some kinds of food. Alternate translation: “those who are weak in faith” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:2

πρὸς οἰκοδομήν

By this, Paul means to strengthen someone’s faith. Alternate translation: “to strengthen his faith” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:3

καθὼς γέγραπται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “someone wrote in the scriptures” (See: Active or Passive)

καθὼς γέγραπται

Here Paul refers to a scripture where Christ (the Messiah) speaks to God. Alternate translation: “the Messiah said to God in the scriptures” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ τῶν ὀνειδιζόντων σε, ἐπέπεσαν ἐπ’ ἐμέ

The insults of those who insulted God fell on Christ.

Romans 15:4

ὅσα γὰρ προεγράφη, εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν διδασκαλίαν ἐγράφη

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For in times past, the prophets wrote everything in the Scriptures to teach us” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡμετέραν…ἔχωμεν

Paul includes his readers and other believers. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

ἵνα διὰ τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως τῶν Γραφῶν, τὴν ἐλπίδα ἔχωμεν

Here, have hope means that the believers will know that God will fulfill his promises. You can make explicit the full meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “In this way the scriptures will encourage us to expect that God will do for us everything that he has promised” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:5

Paul encourages the believers to remember that both Gentile believers and Jews that believe are made one in Christ.

Θεὸς…δῴη

Alternate translation: “I pray that … God … will grant”

τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν ἐν ἀλλήλοις

Alternate translation: “to be in agreement with each other” or “to be united”

Romans 15:6

ἐν ἑνὶ στόματι, δοξάζητε

This means to be united in praising God. Alternate translation: “praise God together in unity as if only one mouth were speaking” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 15:7

προσλαμβάνεσθε ἀλλήλους

Alternate translation: “accept one another”

Romans 15:8

λέγω γὰρ

The pronoun I refers to Paul.

Χριστὸν διάκονον γεγενῆσθαι περιτομῆς

Here, the circumcision is a metonym that refers to the Jews. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ has been made a servant of the Jews” (See: Metonymy)

Χριστὸν διάκονον γεγενῆσθαι περιτομῆς

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ has become a servant of the Jews” (See: Active or Passive)

εἰς τὸ βεβαιῶσαι τὰς ἐπαγγελίας

This is one of the two purposes for which Christ became a servant of the circumcision.

τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων

Here, the fathers refers to the ancestors of the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the promises to the ancestors of the Jews” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων

You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “the promises that God gave to the ancestors of the Jews” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 15:9

τὰ δὲ ἔθνη, ὑπὲρ ἐλέους δοξάσαι τὸν Θεόν

This is the second reason for which Christ became a servant of the circumcision. Alternate translation: “and in order that the Gentiles might glorify God for his mercy”

καθὼς γέγραπται

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “as someone has written in the scriptures” (See: Active or Passive)

τῷ ὀνόματί σου ψαλῶ

Here, your name is a metonym that refers to God. Alternate translation: “sing praise to you” (See: Metonymy)

Romans 15:10

καὶ πάλιν λέγει

Alternate translation: “And again the scripture says”

μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ

This refers to God’s people. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “with the people of God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:11

ἐπαινεσάτωσαν αὐτὸν

Alternate translation: “let … praise the Lord”

Romans 15:12

ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ Ἰεσσαί

Jesse was the physical father of King David. Alternate translation: “descendant of Jesse” (See: Metonymy)

ἐπ’ αὐτῷ ἔθνη ἐλπιοῦσιν

Here, him refers to the descendant of Jesse, the Messiah. Those who are not Jews will also trust him to fulfill his promises. Alternate translation: “the people who are not Jews can trust him to do what he has promised” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:13

πληρώσαι ὑμᾶς πάσης χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης

Paul exaggerates here to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “may … fill you with great joy and peace” (See: Hyperbole)

Romans 15:14

Paul reminds the believers in Rome that God chose him to reach the Gentiles.

πέπεισμαι…ἀδελφοί μου, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐγὼ περὶ ὑμῶν

Paul is quite sure that the believers in Rome are honoring each other in their behavior. Alternate translation: “I myself am completely sure that you yourselves have acted toward others in a completely good way” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀδελφοί

Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.

πεπληρωμένοι πάσης γνώσεως

Paul exaggerates here to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “having been filled with sufficient knowledge to follow God” (See: Hyperbole)

δυνάμενοι καὶ ἀλλήλους νουθετεῖν

Here, to exhort means to teach. Alternate translation: “also able to teach each other” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:15

τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ

Paul speaks of grace as if it were a physical gift that God had given him. God had appointed Paul and apostle even though he had persecuted believers before he decided to follow Jesus. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “the grace that God gave me” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 15:16

γένηται ἡ προσφορὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν εὐπρόσδεκτος

Paul speaks of his preaching the gospel as if he, as a priest, were making an offering to God. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles might please God when they obey him” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 15:18

οὐ γὰρ τολμήσω τι λαλεῖν, ὧν οὐ κατειργάσατο Χριστὸς δι’ ἐμοῦ, εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ

You can translate this double negative in a positive form. Alternate translation: “For the sake of the obedience of the Gentiles, I will only speak of what Christ has accomplished through me in my words and actions and by the power of signs and wonders through the power of the Holy Spirit” (See: Double Negatives)

εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν

Alternate translation: “so that the Gentiles will obey God”

λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ

Here, word and deed refers to what Christ has accomplished through Paul. Alternate translation: “through me in my words and actions” or “the things that Christ has accomplished through what I have said and done” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:19

σημείων καὶ τεράτων

These two words mean basically the same thing and refer to various kinds of miracles. (See: Doublet)

ὥστε…ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ καὶ κύκλῳ μέχρι τοῦ Ἰλλυρικοῦ

This is from the city of Jerusalem as far as the province of Illyricum, a region close to Italy.

Romans 15:20

οὕτως δὲ φιλοτιμούμενον εὐαγγελίζεσθαι, οὐχ ὅπου ὠνομάσθη Χριστός

Paul only wants to preach to people who have never heard of Christ. Alternate translation: “but because of this, I want to preach the good news in places where people have never heard of Christ” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα μὴ ἐπ’ ἀλλότριον θεμέλιον οἰκοδομῶ

Paul speaks of his ministry work as if he were building a house on a foundation. Alternate translation: “in order that I might not be simply continuing the work that someone else already started. I do not want to be like a man who builds a house on someone else’s foundation” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 15:21

καθὼς γέγραπται

Here Paul refers to what Isaiah wrote in the scriptures. You can make the meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “what is happening is like what was written by Isaiah in the scriptures” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καθὼς γέγραπται

You can translate this in an active form and make the meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “what is happening is like what Isaiah wrote in the scriptures” (See: Active or Passive)

οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ

You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “Those whom no one had told the news about him” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 15:22

Paul tells the believers in Rome about his personal plans to visit them and asks the believers to pray.

καὶ ἐνεκοπτόμην

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “they also hindered me” or “people also hindered me” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 15:23

μηκέτι τόπον ἔχων ἐν τοῖς κλίμασι τούτοις

Paul implies that there are no more places in these areas where people live who have not heard about Christ. Alternate translation: “there are no more places in these regions where people have not heard about Christ” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:24

τὴν Σπανίαν

At that time, Spain was a Roman province west of Rome that Paul desired to visit. (See: How to Translate Names)

διαπορευόμενος

Alternate translation: “as I pass through Rome” or “while I am on my way”

καὶ ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ

Here Paul implies that he wants the Roman believers to provide some financial assistance to him for his journey to Spain. Alternate translation: “that you will provide for me on my journey” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ

You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “and that you will help me on my journey” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐὰν ὑμῶν πρῶτον ἀπὸ μέρους ἐμπλησθῶ

Alternate translation: “after I have enjoyed spending some time with you”

Romans 15:26

εὐδόκησαν…Μακεδονία καὶ Ἀχαΐα

Here the words Macedonia and Achaia are synecdoches for the people who live in those areas. Alternate translation: “the believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Achaia were happy” (See: Synecdoche)

Romans 15:27

εὐδόκησαν γάρ

Alternate translation: “Indeed, the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were pleased to do it”

ὀφειλέται εἰσὶν αὐτῶν

Alternate translation: “indeed the people of Macedonia and Achaia are in debt to the believers in Jerusalem”

εἰ…τοῖς πνευματικοῖς αὐτῶν ἐκοινώνησαν τὰ ἔθνη, ὀφείλουσιν καὶ ἐν τοῖς σαρκικοῖς λειτουργῆσαι αὐτοῖς

Alternate translation: “since the Gentiles have shared in the spiritual things of the Jerusalem believers, the Gentiles ought to share their physical things with the Jerusalem believers”

Romans 15:28

σφραγισάμενος αὐτοῖς τὸν καρπὸν τοῦτον

Paul speaks of the money he is taking to Jerusalem as if it were a fruit that was collected and sealed for them. Alternate translation: “and have safely delivered this offering to them” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 15:29

ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χριστοῦ, ἐλεύσομαι

This phrase means that Christ will bless Paul and the Roman believers. Alternate translation: “Christ will abundantly bless us” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:30

δὲ

If your language has a way to show that Paul has stopped talking about the good things he is confident of (Romans 15:29) and is now starting to talk about the dangers he faces, use it here.

παρακαλῶ…ὑμᾶς

Alternate translation: “I encourage you”

ἀδελφοί

Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.

συναγωνίσασθαί

Alternate translation: “to work hard with” or “to struggle with”

Romans 15:31

ῥυσθῶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀπειθούντων

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may rescue me from those who are disobedient” or “God may keep those who are disobedient from harming me” (See: Active or Passive)

καὶ ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ εὐπρόσδεκτος τοῖς ἁγίοις γένηται

Here Paul expresses his desire that the saints in Jerusalem will gladly accept the money from the believers in Macedonia and Achaia. Alternate translation: “and pray that the believers in Jerusalem will be glad to receive the money that I am bringing them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 15:33

ὁ…Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης μετὰ

The God of peace means the God who causes believers to have inner peace. Alternate translation: “I pray that God who causes all of us to have inner peace may be with” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 16

Romans 16 General Notes

Structure and formatting

1. Conclusion (15:14–16:27)
   • Paul describes his mission (15:14–21)
   • Paul’s travel plans (15:22–33)
   • Paul commends Phoebe (16:1–2)
   • Paul greets Christians in Rome (16:3–16)
   • Paul warns against false teachers (16:17–20)
   • Paul greets more Christians in Rome (16:21–24)
   • Doxology (16:25–27)

In this chapter, Paul gives personal greetings to some of the Christians in Rome. It was common to end a letter in the ancient Near East with this type of personal greeting.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Because of the personal nature of this chapter, much of the context is unknown. This will make translation more difficult. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 16:1

Paul then greets many of the believers in Rome by name.

συνίστημι δὲ ὑμῖν Φοίβην

Alternate translation: “I want you to respect Phoebe”

Φοίβην

Phoebe is a woman’s name. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὴν ἀδελφὴν ἡμῶν

The word our refers to Paul and all believers. Alternate translation: “our sister in Christ” (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Κενχρεαῖς

Cenchrea was a seaport city in Greece. (See: How to Translate Names)

Romans 16:2

αὐτὴν προσδέξησθε ἐν Κυρίῳ

Paul encourages the Roman believers to welcome Phoebe as a fellow believer. Alternate translation: “you would welcome her because we all belong to the Lord” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀξίως τῶν ἁγίων

Alternate translation: “in the way that believers should welcome other believers”

παραστῆτε αὐτῇ

Paul encourages the Roman believers to give to Phoebe anything she needs. Alternate translation: “help her” (See: Euphemism)

καὶ…προστάτις πολλῶν ἐγενήθη καὶ ἐμοῦ αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “has helped many people, and she has also helped me”

Romans 16:3

Πρίσκαν καὶ Ἀκύλαν

Priscilla was the wife of Aquila. (See: How to Translate Names)

τοὺς συνεργούς μου ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

Paul’s fellow workers are people who also tell others about Jesus. Alternate translation: “who work with me to tell people about Christ Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 16:5

καὶ τὴν κατ’ οἶκον αὐτῶν ἐκκλησίαν

Alternate translation: “and greet the believers who meet in their house to worship”

Ἐπαίνετον

Epaenetus is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀπαρχὴ τῆς Ἀσίας εἰς Χριστόν

Paul speaks of Epaenetus as if he were a fruit that he harvested. Alternate translation: “first person in Asia to believe in Jesus” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 16:6

Μαρίαν

Mary is a woman’s name. (See: How to Translate Names)

Romans 16:7

Ἀνδρόνικον

Andronicus is a man’s name. (See: How to Translate Names)

Ἰουνίαν

This could refer to: (1) Junia, a woman’s name. (2) Junias, a man’s name, although this is less likely. (See: How to Translate Names)

οἵτινές εἰσιν ἐπίσημοι ἐν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles know very well” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 16:8

Ἀμπλιᾶτον

Ampliatus is a man’s name. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὸν ἀγαπητόν μου ἐν Κυρίῳ

Alternate translation: “my dear friend and fellow believer in the Lord”

Romans 16:9

Οὐρβανὸν…Στάχυν

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Romans 16:10

Ἀπελλῆν…Ἀριστοβούλου

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὸν δόκιμον ἐν Χριστῷ

The word approved refers to someone who has been tested and proved to be genuine. Alternate translation: “whom Christ has approved”

Romans 16:11

Ἡρῳδίωνα…Ναρκίσσου

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

τοὺς ὄντας ἐν Κυρίῳ

This refers to those who trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who are believers” or “who belong to the Lord” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 16:12

Τρύφαιναν…Τρυφῶσαν…Περσίδα

These are women’s names. (See: How to Translate Names)

Romans 16:13

Ῥοῦφον

Rufus is a man’s name. (See: How to Translate Names)

τὸν ἐκλεκτὸν ἐν Κυρίῳ

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord has chosen” (See: Active or Passive)

τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐμοῦ

Paul speaks of the mother of Rufus as if she were his own mother. Alternate translation: “his mother, whom I also think of as my mother” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 16:14

Ἀσύγκριτον, Φλέγοντα, Ἑρμῆν, Πατροβᾶν, Ἑρμᾶν

These are names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀδελφούς

Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.

Romans 16:15

Φιλόλογον…Νηρέα…Ὀλυμπᾶν

These are names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Ἰουλίαν

Julia is the name of a woman. She was probably the wife of Philologus. (See: How to Translate Names)

Romans 16:16

φιλήματι ἁγίῳ

an expression of affection for fellow believers

ἀσπάζονται ὑμᾶς αἱ ἐκκλησίαι πᾶσαι τοῦ Χριστοῦ

Here Paul speaks in a general manner concerning the churches of Christ. Alternate translation: “The believers in all the churches in this area send their greetings to you” (See: Hyperbole)

Romans 16:17

Paul gives one last warning to the believers about unity and living for God.

ἀδελφοί

Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.

σκοπεῖν

Alternate translation: “to watch out for”

τὰς διχοστασίας καὶ τὰ σκάνδαλα…ποιοῦντας

This refers to those who argue and cause others to stop trusting in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who are causing believers to argue with one another and to stop having faith in God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

παρὰ τὴν διδαχὴν ἣν ὑμεῖς ἐμάθετε

Alternate translation: “and teaching things that do not agree with the truth you have already learned”

ἐκκλίνετε ἀπ’ αὐτῶν

Here, turn away is a metaphor for “refuse to listen.” Alternate translation: “do not listen to them” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 16:18

ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ

The words “they serve” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “but they serve their own stomach” (See: Ellipsis)

ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ

Here, stomach is a metonym that refers to physical desires. Alternate translation: “but they only care about their physical desires” (See: Metonymy)

ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ

Serving there stomach represents satisfying their desires. Alternate translation: “but they only want to satisfy their own selfish desires” (See: Metaphor)

καὶ διὰ τῆς χρηστολογίας καὶ εὐλογίας

The words smooth and flattering mean basically the same thing. Paul is emphasizing how these people are deceiving believers. Alternate translation: “and by saying things that seem to be good and true” (See: Doublet)

ἐξαπατῶσι τὰς καρδίας τῶν ἀκάκων

Here, hearts is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner being. Alternate translation: “they deceive the innocent believers” (See: Metonymy)

τῶν ἀκάκων

This refers to those who are simple, inexperienced, and naive. Alternate translation: “of those who innocently trust them” or “of those who do not know these teachers are fooling them”

Romans 16:19

ἡ γὰρ ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ, εἰς πάντας ἀφίκετο

Here Paul speaks of the Roman believers’ obedience as if it were a person who could go to people. Alternate translation: “For everyone has heard how you obey Jesus” (See: Personification)

ἀκεραίους…εἰς τὸ κακόν

Alternate translation: “not involved in doing evil things”

Romans 16:20

ὁ δὲ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης συντρίψει τὸν Σατανᾶν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας ὑμῶν ἐν τάχει

The phrase crush … under your feet refers to complete victory over an enemy. Here Paul speaks of the victory over Satan as if the Roman believers were trampling an enemy under their feet. Alternate translation: “Soon God will give you peace and complete victory over Satan” (See: Metaphor)

Romans 16:21

Paul gives greetings from the believers who are with him.

Λούκιος…Ἰάσων…Σωσίπατρος

These are names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Romans 16:22

ἐγὼ, Τέρτιος, ὁ γράψας τὴν ἐπιστολὴν

Tertius is the man who wrote down what Paul spoke. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀσπάζομαι ὑμᾶς…ἐν Κυρίῳ

Alternate translation: “greet you as a fellow believer”

Romans 16:23

Γάϊος…Ἔραστος…Κούαρτος

These are names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὁ ξένος

This refers to Gaius, the person in whose house Paul and his fellow believers gathered for worship.

ὁ οἰκονόμος

This is a person who takes care of the money for a group.

Romans 16:25

Paul closes with a prayer of blessing.

δὲ

Here the word Now marks the closing section of the letter. If you have a way of doing this in your language, you can use it here.

ὑμᾶς στηρίξαι

Paul speaks here of having strong faith as if a person were being set firmly in place. Alternate translation: “to make your faith strong” (See: Metaphor)

κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου, καὶ τὸ κήρυγμα Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Alternate translation: “by the good news that I have preached about Jesus Christ”

κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου

Paul says that God has revealed previously hidden truths to the believers. He speaks of these truths as if they were a secret. Alternate translation: “because God has revealed to us believers what had been kept secret for a long time” (See: Metaphor)

κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου

You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “because God has revealed to us believers the secret that he was keeping for a long time” (See: Active or Passive)

Romans 16:26

φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν διά τε Γραφῶν προφητικῶν, κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως, εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη γνωρισθέντος

The verbs revealed and made known mean basically the same thing. Paul uses both of them to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “but now the mystery has been made known to all the nations through the prophetic writings so people can believe” (See: Doublet)

φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν διά τε Γραφῶν προφητικῶν, κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως, εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη γνωρισθέντος

You can combine the verbs revealed and made known in an active form. Alternate translation: “but now the eternal God has made it known to all the nations through the prophetic writings so that people would believe” (See: Active or Passive)

εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως

Here, obedience and faith are abstract nouns. You can use the verbs “obey” and “trust” in your translation. Alternate translation: “so that all nations will believe and obey” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως

You may need to make explicit who will obey and trust. Alternate translation: “so that all nations will obey God because they trust in him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Romans 16:27

μόνῳ σοφῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ᾧ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας. ἀμήν!

Here, through Jesus Christ refers to what Jesus did. To give glory means to praise God. Alternate translation: “Because of what Jesus Christ has done for us, we will praise forever the one who alone is God and who alone is wise. Amen!” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)